Lexicon Rv 8 Owner S Manual

RV-8 to the manual 925c3041-409a-4577-bb1f-3a0a8e8a3ef5

2014-07-06

: Lexicon Lexicon-Rv-8-Owner-S-Manual lexicon-rv-8-owner-s-manual lexicon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 262 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

RV-8 Receiver

User Guide

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with a dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia-

tors, heat registers, stoves, or another apparatus

(including amplifiers) that produces heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two

blades with one wider than the other. A grounding-

type plug has two blades and a third grounding

prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro-

vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not

fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or

table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid

injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as when a power-supply

cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or

objects have fallen into the apparatus, the appara-

tus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

• Refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions

for power requirements. Be advised that different

operating voltages may require the use of different

line cord and/or attachment plug.

• Do not install the unit in an unventilated rack, or

directly above heat-producing equipment such as

power amplifiers. Observe the maximum ambient

operating temperature listed in the product specifi-

cation.

• Never attach audio power amplifier outputs directly

to any of the unit’s connectors.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

or television reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on. The user is encour-

aged to try to correct the interference by one or more

of the following measures:

• Re-orient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment

and the receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is con-

nected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/televi-

sion technician for help.

To reduce the risk of fire or electric

shock, do not expose this apparatus to

rain or moisture. Do not place objects

containing liquid, such as vases, on this

apparatus.

WARNING

Lexicon Inc.

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0490

www.harmanspecialtygroup.com

Customer Service

Telephone: 781-280-0300

Sales Fax: 781-280-0495

Service Fax: 781-280-0499

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Pat. No’s 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 and other U.S. and world-wide patents issued and pending. DTS, DTS-ES, Neo:6, and DTS 96/24 are

Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703 and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX

is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.

SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.

SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

Hammerhead is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

Lexicon, Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553;

D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. Lexicon LIVE is a trademark of Harman Interna-

tional Industries, Inc.

This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains is

subject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this

document.

Introduction Lexicon

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS

This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide before

attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.

The following symbols are used in the document:

Appears on the component to indicate the pres-

ence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside

the enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient to

constitute a risk of shock.

Appears on the component to indicate impor-

tant operating and maintenance instructions in

the accompanying literature.

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-

tion or the like that, if not correctly performed

or adhered to, could result in injury or death.

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-

tion or the like that, if not correctly performed

or adhered to, could result in damage or

destruction to part or all of the product.

Calls attention to information that is essential to

highlight.

Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be

selected with the remote control Menu  arrow to access the

menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,

INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the

DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will

continue to be used as an example throughout this document.

Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substi-

tuted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a

menu path, any other input may be substituted.

WARNING

CAUTION!

Note:

DVD1

INPUTSSETUP NAME EDIT INPUT NAME

This document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.

RV-8 Introduction

iii

Table of Contents

Documentation Conventions........................................................ ii

Getting Started

About the RV-8..........................................................................1-2

Highlights .............................................................................1-4

Product Registration..................................................................1-5

Installation Considerations.........................................................1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation...........................................1-6

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview................................................................2-2

Rear-Panel Overview..................................................................2-6

Tuner Overview.......................................................................2-10

Selecting a Station ..............................................................2-10

Direct Station Access ...........................................................2-10

Tune/Seek Access ................................................................2-10

Scan Mode ..........................................................................2-11

Loading Presets ...................................................................2-11

Saving Presets ..................................................................... 2-11

Naming Presets ................................................................... 2-11

Editing Presets ..................................................................... 2-12

Autoload .............................................................................2-12

Amplifier Overview..................................................................2-13

Amplifier Channel Status .....................................................2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output .................. 2-13

Headphone Overview..............................................................2-14

Remote Control Overview.......................................................2-14

Operation Considerations ....................................................2-14

MAIN Menu ........................................................................2-15

Menu Navigation ................................................................2-15

Menu Item Selection ...........................................................2-15

Remote Control Buttons ......................................................2-17

Command Matrix ............................................................... 2-18

Understanding the Zones........................................................2-28

Two-Line Status.......................................................................2-28

STATUS Menus........................................................................2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions ................................ 2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters.....................................................2-35

Setup

Setup........................................................................................3-2

Input Setup...............................................................................3-4

Changing Input Names ......................................................... 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................ 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes .................................... 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings .................................. 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings ....................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings .............................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup.........................................................................3-25

Setting Crossover Points ...................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters ................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration ......................................................... 3-36

Manual Calibration ............................................................. 3-53

I/O Config...............................................................................3-60

Display Setup..........................................................................3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ..................................................... 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup ................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup.............................................................3-68

Trigger Setup..........................................................................3-70

Tuner Setup ............................................................................3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ........................... 3-73

Lock Options...........................................................................3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION.................................................................3-80

Introduction Lexicon

Audio Controls

Audio Controls ..........................................................................4-2

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets.............................................................................5-2

Mode Adjust

Mode Adjust..............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation.........................................................6-2

Preferred Listening Mode Selection ........................................6-3

MODE  and  BUTTONS ...................................................6-3

Listening MODE SELECTION BUTTONS .................................6-3

Listening Mode Descriptions......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions......6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships..............................................6-47

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance.................................................................7-4

Restoring Factory-Default Settings.............................................7-4

Appendix A

Specifications ............................................................................A-2

Declaration of Conformity.........................................................A-4

Appendix B

Menu Tree.................................................................................B-2

Appendix C

Remote Control Programming.................................................. C-2

Device Activation ...................................................................C-2

Macro Operations .................................................................C-3

Remote Programming Overview ............................................C-4

Programming Macro Buttons ..............................................C-10

Three-digit Preprogrammed Codes......................................... C-18

Appendix D

Installation Worksheet ..............................................................D-2

Getting Started

About the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2

Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Product Registration................................................................... 1-5

Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation............................................ 1-6

Getting Started Lexicon

1-2

ABOUT THE RV-8

Thank you for purchasing the RV-8 Receiver, an 8-channel audio

and video control center with independent zone monitoring that

provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones

at the same time. The RV-8 includes eight configurable inputs, each

of which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio,

eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video or

three component video input connectors. The analog connectors

can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.

The RV-8 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that is

designed to achieve high levels of power and performance.

Equipped with a toroidal power transformer, the amplifier also

provides thermal and DC protection.

The RV-8 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions,

allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 preset

stations, can receive elements of the Radio Data System (RDS)

broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-8

also includes a phono input.

Inside and out, the RV-8 is designed for possible future develop-

ments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable of

performing configuration downloads and flash memory software

upgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.

The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accom-

modate connectors for emerging technologies.

More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-8 features

the latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed Logic 7®

decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and

5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is

compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.

Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7

decoding is widely regarded as the finest available. A Logic

7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available

when using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source is

present, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using

LOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create a

headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround

sound, while preserving the original stereo image.

In addition to Logic 7, the RV-8 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/24, DTS neo:6,

DTS-ES, THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2

certification guarantees that the RV-8 meets the highest THX®

specifications.

The RV-8 also offers LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable

Environment), designed to transform the way your listening room

sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the

occupants of the room. LIVE! does not (nor is it meant to) work with

prerecorded material. LIVE! provides a realistic illusion of a larger,

more reverberant listening space–ideal for musicians wishing to

practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue.

LIVE! is a unique, sophisticated reverberation system that uses a

combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to

enhance a room’s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger

space. When you engage in normal conversation, it seems as if you

are in a large room. When you practice or perform with a musical

instrument, it seems as if you are in a concert hall. Choose from one

of three customizable presets to create an ambience to liven up a

party or amaze your friends.

With two floating-point Hammerhead™ digital signal processing

(DSP) engines, the RV-8 boasts enormous processing power. These

RV-8 Getting Started

1-3

powerful processors perform custom Lexicon processing such as

Logic 7 decoding, bass enhancement, dialogue enhancement, auto

azimuth, five-speaker enhancement, bass management, high-

precision digital crossovers and audio controls. These features are

available at sample rates of up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to

retain top performance from all sources. In addition, a third DSP

engine is dedicated to decoding multichannel compressed audio

sources.

The RV-8 is one of the most advanced audio and video control

centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can

be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital

signals, allowing the RV-8 to provide the benefits of precise digital

signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZ

D/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,

5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion

and internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to the

output connectors.

Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase

lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.

Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and

level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate

playback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio pass-

through output is available for recording digital signals with a CD

recorder or a similar component.

Complementing its audio performance, the RV-8 features broadcast-

quality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidth component video

switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals, while a

composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC, PAL or

SECAM video signals. Composite and S-Video sources can be

converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) component video. The component

video switcher can pass high-definition TV (HDTV) signals and

standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Both switchers are designed to

pass video signals without alteration or degradation.

Built to professional standards, the RV-8 is designed to serve as the

control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most

demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination

of power, performance, flexibility and technological sophistication.

With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-8 represents a solid

investment that will retain its value in the face of rapidly emerging

technologies.

Getting Started Lexicon

1-4

HIGHLIGHTS

• Eight channels

• Eight configurable inputs

• Three independent zones

• Integrated 7-channel amplifier with

thermal and DC protection and toroidal

power transformer

•Compatible with 2

Ω speaker

impedances

• AM/FM stereo radio tuner

•RDS

• Phono input with 2-channel analog

bypass path

• Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input

connectors

• Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog

stereo audio input connectors

• Auto switching between digital and

analog audio input connectors

• Headphone output with LOGIC7

processing

• Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom

processing

• Separate DSP engine for decoding

compressed audio sources

• Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF

optical (Toslink) digital audio input

connectors

• One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF

optical (Toslink) digital audio output

connectors

• 24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all

audio channels

• Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs;

one fixed, one variable

• One set of analog Zone 3 outputs,

variable level

• Broadcast-quality video switching

• Video up conversion from S-video/

composite to component video

• Automatic and manual calibration of

speaker distances and output levels

• Three component video input

connectors with full HDTV compatibility

• Five composite video input connectors

•Five S-Video input connectors

• One component video output

• Logic 7 decoding

• Two 32-bit DSP engines

• LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable

Environment)

• Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro

Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding

• DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES

(discrete and matrix) decoding

• THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX

decoding

• THX Ultra2 certification

• RS-232 control

• Two trigger output connectors

• Rear-panel IR input connector

• Two microphone input connectors

• Two internal expansion slots

• Removable access panel

• Flash memory software upgrade

capabilities

• Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit

• IR preprogrammed/learning remote

control with LCD display

• Maximum volume level

RV-8 Getting Started

1-5

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register the RV-8 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.

product registration card attached to the back cover of this user

guide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

The RV-8 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal

performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and to

other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.

DO install the RV-8 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or

shelf. The RV-8 can also be installed in a standard 19-inch

equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an

authorized Lexicon dealer.

DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.

DO NOT expose the RV-8 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,

smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-8 near

radiators or stacking the RV-8 over other heat-producing

equipment such as a power amplifier.

DO NOT install the RV-8 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable

TV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might cause

interference.

DO NOT place the RV-8 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8

with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.

DO NOT place the RV-8 on a windowsill or any location exposed to

direct sunlight.

DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote

control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper

operation.

DO NOT install the RV-8 on a surface that is unstable or unable to

support all four feet.

CAUTION!

Before moving the RV-8, power the unit off using the rear-

panel power switch and unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet.

Getting Started Lexicon

1-6

REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION

The remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without

leaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the

RV-8. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

To replace the remote control batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control.

2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).

3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).

4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).

5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview .................................................................2-2

Rear-Panel Overview...................................................................2-6

Tuner Overview........................................................................2-10

Selecting a Station...................................................................................2-10

Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10

Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10

Scan Mode..............................................................................................2-11

Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11

Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11

Editing Presets.........................................................................................2-12

Autoload .................................................................................................2-12

Amplifier Overview...................................................................2-12

Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output......................................2-13

Headphone Overview...............................................................2-13

Remote Control Overview.........................................................2-14

Operation Considerations........................................................................2-14

MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14

Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14

Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15

Remote Control Buttons..........................................................................2-17

Command Matrix....................................................................................2-18

Understanding the Zones .........................................................2-28

Two-Line Status........................................................................2-28

STATUS Menus.........................................................................2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters......................................................2-35

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-2

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

12 13 14

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-3

1 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening

mode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active,

the display will show the frequency, band, listening mode and

volume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display

for messages and menus, one line at a time.

Note:

Power is still supplied to the RV-8 when standby mode is activated.

2 IR RECEIVER

The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-8 remote

control. There are three associated LEDs.

• The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is

received.

• The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.

• The blue LED lights when the RV-8 is powered on and activated

– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is

set to ALWAYS OFF.

3 VOLUME KNOB

Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.

To adjust the Main Zone volume level:

Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase

or counterclockwise to decrease volume level

in 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graph

indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the

on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is

–80 to +12dB.

To adjust the Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level:

1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2 or Zone 3 input selection

button that corresponds with the current input source. For

instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1 input, press

and hold the DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.

2. While holding the desired zone input

selection button, rotate the volume knob

clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to

decrease volume level in 1dB increments.

The corresponding horizontal graph

appears in the on-screen and front-panel

displays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2 or

Zone 3 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.

3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2

or Zone 3 volume level has been set.

Note:

When RV-8 output levels have been properly calibrated, the +0dB volume

level setting corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).

Amber LED

Red LED

Blue LED

VOLUME -34db

ZONE 2 VOLUME -34db

ZONE 3 VOLUME -34db

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-4

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)

4 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input is

selected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone

input selection button activates the corresponding input in the

Main Zone. Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Zone 2

or Zone 3 input is selected.

5 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input is

selected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input

selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. The

Main Zone and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 3 input is selected.

6 ZONE 3 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 3. When an input is

selected, a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When Zone 3 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 3 input

selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 3. The

Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 2 input is selected.

7 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS

Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies,

selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling of

presets. See “Tuner Overview” on page 2-10 for additional

information.

8 STANDBY BUTTON

Toggles the RV-8 between on and standby. When the RV-8 is

powered on, pressing this button places the RV-8 into standby and

lights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-8

when in standby. When the RV-8 is in standby, pressing the button

turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the

previous operating session.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWN

OUT!! PRESS STANDBY message. To turn the unit on, use the

STANDBY button. For more information, see “POWER

MANAGEMENT” on page 3-3.

9 CHANNEL STATUS LEDs

Each amplifier channel has a blue LED on the front panel that is

illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem with

an amplifier channel, the corresponding LED will turn off. See

“Amplifier Overview” on page 2-13 for additional information.

10 MODE  and  BUTTONS

Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous () or next ()

available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the

MODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “Listening Mode Activation” on

page 6-2 for more information.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-5

11 MUTE BUTTON

Mutes or restores the RV-8 Main Zone volume to its original level. Press

the Mute button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in the

on-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mute button again to

restore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels.

Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, the

RV-8 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or

listening modes. The amber Mute button LED lights whenever

mute is activated.

12 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON

Deactivates the Main Zone.

13 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON

Deactivates Zone 2.

14 ZONE 3 OFF BUTTON

Deactivates Zone 3.

15 TUNE/SEEK BUTTONS

Allow for manual or automatic tuning of the AM/FM stereo radio

tuner.

16 HEADPHONE OUTPUT

Features multiple listening modes including LOGIC7 headphone

processing. The headphone output follows the signal selected in

the Main Zone. When headphones are plugged into the

headphone output, all Main Zone amplifier outputs are muted. If

amplifier outputs 3 and 7 are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3, they

remain unmuted. The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also

muted when headphones are plugged in. Preamplifier outputs for

Zone 2 and Zone3 remain unmuted. See “Headphone Overview”

on page 2-14 for additional headphone information. Headphone

listening mode information starts on page 6-34.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-6

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

CAUTION! Never make or break connections to the RV-8 unless the RV-8 and all associated components are powered off.

910811

12 14

13 15 16 17 18 19 20

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-7

1 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS

Provide audio outputs to the speakers. The Center channel output

and all Right channel outputs are located on the left-hand side of

the rear-panel. All Left channel outputs are located on the right-

hand side of the rear-panel. This organizaion facilitates making

speaker connections. The amplifier binding posts accommodate the

following connectors:

• standard 0.75-inch banana plugs

• size 10-12 gauge spade connectors

• up to 10-gauge bare wire

See page 2-13 for additional amplifier information.

2 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. Five

composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, and five S-Video

connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5 are available.

3 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled Audio 1 to 8 are

available. Connectors labeled 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be configured

as 5.1-channel connectors.

When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone,

input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as

indicated in the following table. When a 5.1-channel analog source is

present in the Main Zone, only the Front (L) and (R) input signals are

sent to the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. If the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the 5.1 analog

source is sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. See “ZONE2 in

Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for additional information.

4 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

Three component video input connectors labeled Component Video 1

to 3 are available for use in the Main Zone and have full HDTV compat-

ibility. The ultra-wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts

any analog component or RGB video input type. The component

video connectors are not available for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

5 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video output in the Main Zone. Two composite video

connectors, two S-Video connectors and one component video

connector are available.

Input Connector Output Connector

(L) Front L

(R) Front R

(SUB) Subwoofer

(LS) Side L and Rear L

(RS) Side R and Rear R

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-8

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)

6 ZONE 2 VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video connector

and one S-Video connector is available. Alternatively, these

connectors can be used to connect a video recording device.

Note:

• Composite video output connectors are available when a composite

or S-Video source is present.

• S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is

present.

• Component video output connectors are available when a

component video source is present.

7 ZONE 2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two pairs of connectors,

one labeled “Fix” and the other labeled “Var” are available. These

connectors can also be used to connect a recording device. For

recording, use the output connector labeled “Fix,” which provides

a fixed output level of +0dB. If output level adjustment is needed,

use the output labeled “Var” and adjust the Zone 2 volume.

Note:

When using an analog input source, the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio outputs

are approximately 2dB lower than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/

R. When using a digital input source, the Zone 2 audio outputs are

approximately 6dB higher than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/R.

This is to accommodate THX level requirements.

8 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS

Provide two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radio tuner.

9 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS (S/PDIF)

Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone or Zone 2. Four S/PDIF

coaxial and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are

available. Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and

96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not

compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.

10 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS

Provides microphone input for automatic calibration.

11 PHONO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide a phono level input, which can be assigned to any of the eight

RV-8 inputs. A 2-channel analog bypass path is available (with RIAA

curve). A ground connector is also provided. The phono input is

optimized for moving magnet phono cartridges.

12 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide 12V DC output to control connected components. Two

trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal

block. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) is

not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is powered on, and

deactivated when the RV-8 is powered off from the rear panel or by

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-9

putting the RV-8 into standby. The trigger output connector

(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See

“Trigger Setup” on page 3-70 for more information.

13 RS-232 CONNECTORS

The RS-232 serial connector (1) provides serial control and is used to

perform configuration downloads and flash memory software

upgrades. The RS-232 connector (2) is reserved for future

developments.

14 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight connectors

labeled Front L/R, Center, Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.

15 IR IN CONNECTOR

Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.

One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeve

connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.

16 ZONE 3 AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio/video output in Zone 3. One stereo analog

audio output (variable level) is available and can derive its source from

a variety of analog sources. One composite video output is available

and can derive its source from any composite or S-video source.

17 ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

(S/PDIF)

Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial and

one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) connector is available.

18 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL

Reserved for future developments.

19 AC INPUT CONNECTOR

Provides power to the RV-8 through the supplied power cord.

20 POWER SWITCH

Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC

Input connector to the RV-8. The I and O positions represent “on”

and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-8 is powered on, the

front-panel Standby button or remote control On button can be

used to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-8 is

powered off, standby mode is not available.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWNOUT,

CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rear-

panel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switch

has no effect.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-10

TUNER OVERVIEW

The RV-8 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front panel

displays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode and

volume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified by

the preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:

WABC/90.90 FM or Preset 02/10.30 AM. Two antennas are

supplied with the RV-8: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At a

minimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure

consistent tuner performance.

The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio Data

System (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now with

limited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcasting

digital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDS

option is active and RDS data is received, the RV-8 tuner displays

the identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate station

frequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text)

that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,

see “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72.

SELECTING A STATION

Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.

To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button or

select the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. See

the “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72 for more information.

Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the

front-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between the

AM and FM frequency bands.

Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radio

station: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.

DIRECT STATION ACCESS

To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either the

front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency.

To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:

1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.

2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, to

load FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, press

the AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.

Note:

When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appears

in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered,

the RV-8 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status

message to “Setting Frequency.”

TUNE/SEEK ACCESS

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (/) or

remote control ( /) to navigate to the next available

frequency. For example, if the currently loaded frequency is

101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek  button to load 101.9FM. Press the

Tune/Seek button again to load 102.1FM, and so on.

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (/) or

remote control ( /) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.

Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuner

is having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See

“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-11

SCAN MODE

Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for two

seconds on each station before scanning to the next one.

To enter Scan Mode:

Press and hold the front-panel (/) or remote-control ( /)

Tune/Seek buttons until SCAN or SCAN is displayed.

To stop scanning:

Press either Tune/Seek button.

LOADING PRESETS

To load a preset:

Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel or

remote-control number buttons.

A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and

on-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches over

to Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status message

changes to “Setting Frequency.”

To skip through available presets in order:

Press the remote-control  or  button. For example, if preset 1 is

loaded and the  button is pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 2 (or

the next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the  button is

pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset).

Note:

This feature is only accessible via the remote control.

SAVING PRESETS

The RV-8 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. The

presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It is

possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each

bank. Storing presets on the RV-8 can be accomplished from either

the front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical.

To save a station as a preset on the RV-8:

1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A status

message displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel

(and on-screen) display.

2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded

frequency as the corresponding preset.

For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press

the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset

number 1.

Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset

number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset

number to the third digit entered.

Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.

NAMING PRESETS

Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In the

US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what

the broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and

Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program

Service (PS) name.

If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults to

PresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-12

For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,

then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does not

broadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 in

the menu.

EDITING PRESETS

It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-8.

To edit the preset name:

1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNER

PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 contains

presets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.

2. Select the page containing the desired preset.

A list of presets appears.

3. Select the desired preset.

The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters

(or PS), frequency, and band.

The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:

• Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.

• Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset name

can be up to eight characters long.

• Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band informa-

tion from the preset.

See “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2 for additional information.

AUTOLOAD

The RV-8 can automatically scan and store presets. This can be

accomplished only from the remote control. See “Tuner Setup

(continued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.

To start autoloading:

1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUP

menu.

2. Press menu  to start AUTOLOAD.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-13

AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW

The RV-8 features a 7-channel power amplifier with 140W per

channel. The RV-8 can be configured so that all amplifier channels

are dedicated to the Main Zone or so that outputs 3 and 7 (labeled

Rear Right and Rear Left) are used for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Heavy duty

gold plated 5-way binding posts are provided for speaker

connections.

The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection

for each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature of

the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific

channel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temper-

ature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors are

protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by

the output voltage, while DC protection prevents DC and

frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers. Dedicated

channel status LEDs are located on the front panel to provide at-a-

glance viewing of channel status at all times. If the main power

transformer temperature exceeds 100°C, the transformer will

deactivate, all channel status LEDs will no longer be lit and the red

standby LED will flash rapidly. Once the transformer has cooled, it

automatically resets and the amplifier operates normally; the

channel status LEDs turn back on, and the red standby LED is no

longer lit.

The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of perfor-

mance and sound quality. In addition, THX Ultra2 certification

ensures that the amplifiers meet the highest standards set forth by

Lucasfilm's Home THX division.

AMPLIFIER CHANNEL STATUS

Each channel has a blue Channel Status LED on the front panel that

is illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem

with an amplifier channel, the LED will turn off.

MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT

The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires,

banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When using

bare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into the

top of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The same

procedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugs

should be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.

Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedance connec-

tions between the amplifier and the speakers. Observe correct

speaker polarity.

CAUTION! Do not connect the outputs of one channel to

the outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-14

HEADPHONE OVERVIEW

Headphones can be connected to the RV-8 via the Headphone

output on the front panel. The headphone output follows the signal

selected in the Main Zone. If the Main Zone source is multichannel,

a downmix of the source is sent to the headphone output. LOGIC7

headphone processing is also available for stereo or multichannel

sources. To listen to a stereo source without enhanced processing,

set the 2-CH parameter in the INPUT SETUP menu to the

2-CHANNEL listening mode. When headphones are plugged into

the headphone output, all amplifier outputs are muted (including

outputs 3 and 7, unless they are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3). The

Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also muted. Preamplifier

outputs for Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain unmuted. Use the front-

panel volume knob or the remote-control Volume Up/Down

buttons to adjust the headphone output level.

When the headphones are plugged into the headphone output, the

volume defaults to the HEADPHONE parameter value selected in

the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. When the headphones are

unplugged, the volume defaults to the value of the MAIN PWR ON

parameter in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. See page 6-34

for headphone listening mode descriptions.

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 remote control provides full operation of the RV-8,

including commands, such as menu navigation, that are not

available from the front panel. It is also designed to provide control

for the entire home theater system. This section provides a brief

overview of the remote control. For detailed operation/

programming instructions and manufacturing codes, refer to

Appendix C.

OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS

The following factors can improve or impede remote control

operation.

Note the following before operating the RV-8 remote control:

• The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panel

IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control

and the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliable

if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.

• For optimal performance, position the remote control at a

30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m)

from the RV-8. Placing the RV-8 inside a smoked glass cabinet

will reduce the remote control range.

• Remote controls for different components can interfere with

one another. Avoid using remote controls for different compo-

nents at the same time.

• Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-15

MAIN MENU

Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main

menu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIO

CONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.

MENU NAVIGATION

Use the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive

menu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates the

navigation commands that the remote-control buttons perform

when the Main Zone command bank is activated.

Note:

The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10

and RT-20 disc players.

MENU ITEM SELECTION

Use the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to

select menu items.

To select a menu item on the open menu:

1. Press the remote-control  and  arrows to highlight the desired

menu item.

2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu 

arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected,

another menu opens. If a parameter is selected, a parameter

drop-down menu or horizontal graph opens.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

Arrow Navigation Functions

• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu  arrow to select the highlighted menu item.

• When no menus are open, press the Menu  arrow to open the MAIN MENU.



• When a menu is open, press the Menu  arrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subse-

quent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When

the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.

• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu  arrow button performs no function.

• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu  arrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.





• When a menu is open, press the Menu  and  arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list

of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screen

display. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s top

and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-16

MENU OPTIONS

Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu

structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens

the SETUP menu.

PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS

Selecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that contains

a list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting the

CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a

drop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.

To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:

1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control 

and  arrows to scroll upward and downward through the

complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed

beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel

displays.

2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter

name, press the  arrow to accept the setting and close the

drop-down menu.

HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS

Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The

bar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter setting

falls within the entire parameter range.

For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from the

DISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below,

which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.

To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:

1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control

 and  arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the desig-

nated increments. The setting appears to the right of the

parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the 

arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.

Note:

Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instances

are noted throughout this user guide.

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

A/V SYNC DELAY OFF

CUSTOM NAME OFF

OFF, 1 to 60ms

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-17

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. SYSTEM POWER OFF

2. Displays the name of the selected device.

3. POWER ON

4. Device and function buttons

5. Light

6. Displays page number/currently selected device

7. LCD page change

8. FAVORITE

9. HOME menu

10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)

11. Previous channel

12. VOLUME (+/-)

13. MUTE

14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF)

for VCR, DVD and CD

15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)

16. DISPLAY/AM/FM

17. ENTER/SAVE

18. MACRO buttons

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-18

COMMAND MATRIX

The command matrix describes the commands that the remote control buttons perform

when each command bank is active.

BUTTON HOME MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

1Enters RV-8 standby mode.

2Activates the RV-8.

3Displays the MAIN Zone

command bank, which

includes commands

that control the Main

Zone.

Displays the

Main Zone

Status.

Selects the Dolby

Digital listening

mode family.

Displays the Zone 2

Status. Toggles RV8 between

5 speaker and 7

speaker modes.

4Displays the Zone 2

command bank, which

includes commands that

control Zone 2.

Deactivates the

Main Zone. Selects the DTS

listening mode

family.

Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

Main Zone BALANCE

to the left.

5Displays the Zone 3

command bank, which

includes commands that

control Zone 3.

Selects the Tuner

input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the THX

listening mode

family.

Selects the Tuner

input for Zone 2. Sets the Main Zone

Volume level to

-15dB.

6Displays the DVD1

command bank, which

includes commands that

control DVD1.

Selects the

DVD1 input for

the Main Zone.

Toggles between

the current

listening mode

and the 2-

CHANNEL

listening mode.

Selects the DVD1

input for Zone 2. Shows status menu

for current Main Zone

input stream.

STAT2 button: see

page 2-29 for more

information.

7Displays the DVD2

command bank, which

includes commands that

control DVD2.

Selects the

DVD2 input for

the Main Zone.

Analog Bypass

Toggle. Selects the DVD1

input for Zone 2. Activates the RV-8.

8Displays the SAT

command bank, which

includes commands that

control the Satellite box.

Selects the SAT

input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7 FILM

listening mode. Selects the

Satellite input for

Zone 2.

Reserved for future

expansion.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-19

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

1Enters RV-8 standby mode. Reserved for future expansion.

2Activates the RV-8. Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.

3Displays the Status of

Zone 3. Resets the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu BASS,

TREBLE, and TILT EQ

parameter to +0.0dB.

Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.

4Deactivates Zone 3. Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone BASS parameter

in.5dB increments.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Top menu. Opens and closes the

RT-10 or RT-20 Video

Adjust bar.

5Selects the TUNER input

for Zone 3. Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TREBLE parameter

in.5dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 random

playback.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Angle bar.

6Selects the DVD1 input

for Zone 3. Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter

in.2dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 repeat playback. Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 condition

memory mode.

7Selects the DVD2 input

for Zone 3. Deactivates AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS

parameter.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 A-B repeat

playback.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 last memory

playback.

8Selects the Satellite

input for Zone 3. Reserved for future

expansion. Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Setup menu. Creates up to five

shortcuts for frequently

adjusted RT-10 or RT-20

Setup menu parameters.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-20

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

BUTTON HOME MAIN

PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

9Selects the VCR

command bank, which

includes commands

that control the VCR.

Selects the VCR

input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7

Music listening

mode.

Selects the VCR

input for Zone 2. Adjusts the Audio

Controls menu Main

Zone BALANCE

parameter to the

right.

10 Selects the TV

command bank, which

includes commands

that control the TV.

Selects the TV

input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7 TV

listening mode. Selects the TV input

for Zone 2. Sets the Main Zone

volume level to

-30dB.

11 Selects the CD

command bank, which

includes commands

that control the CD

player.

Selects the CD

input for the

Main Zone.

Selects the L7

Music Surround

listening mode.

Selects the CD

input for Zone 2. Toggles the Setup

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY parameter.

12 Selects the Phono

command bank, which

includes commands

that control the

associated device.

Selects the

Phono input for

the Main Zone.

Toggles between

setting the input

to auto, analog or

digital.

Selects the Phono

input for Zone 2. Deactivates the RV-8.

13 N/A Selects Page 2 of

the Main Zone

command bank.

Selects Page 1 of

the Main Zone

command bank.

Selects Page 2 of

the Zone 2

command bank.

Selects Page 1 of the

Zone 2 command

bank.

14 Selects the Home command bank.

15 Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

16 History-dependent* Increases the Main Zone volume level

in 1dB increments. Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB

increments.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-21

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

9Selects the VCR input

for Zone 3. Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu BASS

parameter in .5dB

increments.

Closes certain Setup

menus without saving

the changes.

Activates and deacti-

vates the RT-10 or

RT-20 rear- panel video

output connectors.

10 Selects the TV input for

Zone 3. Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

TREBLE parameter in

.5dB increments.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 display mode. Controls the brightness

of front-panel display

characters.

11 Selects the CD input for

Zone 3. Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter

level in .2dB increments.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Subtitle bar. Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 search mode.

12 Selects the Phono input

for Zone 3. Activates the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS

parameter.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Audio bar. Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 program mode.

13 Displays Zone 3 Page 2

command bank. Displays Zone 3 Page 1

command bank. Displays DVD1 Page 2

command bank. Displays DVD1 Page 1

command bank.

14 Displays the Home command bank.

15 Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

16 Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments Increases RV-8 Main volume level in 1dB

increments

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-22

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

BUTTON HOME MAIN

PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

17 History-dependent* Decreases Main Zone volume level in

1dB increments. Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB

increments.

18 History-dependent* Toggles between fully muting Main

Zone volume level and restoring Main

Zone volume level to its original level.

Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

BALANCE and FADER parameters.

19 History-dependent* Toggles between muting Main Zone

volume level and restoring Main Zone

volume level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 2

volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume

level to its original level.

20 History-dependent* Scrolls upward through listening

modes. Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the

front.

21 History-dependent* Scrolls downward through listening

modes. Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the

back.

22 History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip back to

next available preset.

23 History-dependent* Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.

24 History-dependent* If the RV-8’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  to skip forward

to next available preset.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-23

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

17 Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments. Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB

increments.

18 Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX

SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX

source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when

a stereo source is present.

Toggles between fully muting the RV-8 Main Zone

volume level and restoring Main Zone volume

level to its original level.

19 Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level

and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level. Toggles between muting the RV-8 Main Zone

volume level and restoring Main Zone volume

level to its original level.

20 Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments. Scrolls upward through RV-8 listening modes.

21 Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments. Scrolls downward through RV-8 listening modes.

22 If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, press  to skip back to the next available

preset.

Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or

track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of

the previous chapter or track.

23 Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1. Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular

playback speed.

24 If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, press  to skip forward to the next

available preset.

Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or

track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of

the next chapter or track.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-24

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

BUTTON HOME MAIN

PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

25 History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press  once to tune

to the

next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which

searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold

until the display shows SCAN or SCAN.

26 History-dependent*

27 History-dependent* When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter,

cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.

28 History-dependent* Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

29 History-dependent* Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a

5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.

30 History-dependent* When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

31 History-dependent* Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens

another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted

parameter setting.

32 History-dependent* When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-25

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

25 If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently

selected input, press  once to tune to the next

available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds

activates seek mode, which searches

for the next available radio station. To enter

Scan Mode, press and hold until the display

shows SCAN or SCAN.

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans

through the disc in reverse direction.

26 When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans

through the disc in forward direction.

27 When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the

ES decoding parameter, cycling through the

AUTO, ON and OFF settings.

Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.

28 Deactivates the output connector labeled

Trigger 1. Stops playback of the loaded disc.

29 Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL

listening mode when a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx

Movie when a stereo source is present.

Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.

30 When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

31 Opens the menu structure and selects the

highlighted item. When no menu is open,

opens the MAIN MENU.

Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu

structure.

32 When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-26

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

BUTTON HOME MAIN

PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

33 History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous

menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the

previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows

the two-line status.

34 History-dependent* When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open,

shows the 2-line status.

35 History-dependent* Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load

presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.

36 History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM

frequency bands.

37 History-dependent* If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will

save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button

when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

38 History-dependent* Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See

page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.

39 History-dependent* Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD

screen for easier visibility.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-27

BUTTON ZONE3 PAGE1 ZONE3 PAGE2 DVD1 PAGE1 DVD1 PAGE2

33 When a menu is open, closes the menu and, in

most cases, opens the previous menu.

Subsequent presses continue to close the current

menu and open the previous menu until

the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are

open, this button performs no function.

Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu

structure.

34 When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.

When no menus are open, shows the

two-line status.

Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.

35 Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the

frequency of radio stations or to save/load

presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the

currently selected input.

Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or track

number selection.

36 If the RV-8 built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, toggles between AM/FM frequency

bands.

Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20.

Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for

numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a

number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.

37 If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently

selected input, saves the currently selected tuner

frequency as a preset. Also used to program the

remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modes

and certain playback modes are activated.

38 Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9

for additional information on how to use and program macros.

39 Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier

visibility.

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-28

UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES

The RV-8 features three zones of operation: the Main Zone, Zone 2

and Zone 3. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the

primary listening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio

and composite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording

device. Zone 3 is designed to control analog audio and composite

or S-video signals in an additional listening space. The headphone

output follows the source selected in the Main Zone. LOGIC7

Headphone processing is available on this output.

The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:

1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simul-

taneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However,

different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot be

present in the Main Zone and Zone 2.

2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multi-

channel audio when all of the following conditions are met:

• The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and

Zone 2.

• A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must be

present in the Main Zone.

• The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to

DMIX. See “ZONE2 in Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for

more information.

3. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors will receive

Front L/R when a 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG.

4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix to

Zone 2 is not available.

TWO-LINE STATUS

The two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a change in input source or listening mode.

The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-8 detects a Main

Zone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appears

when a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.

The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used to

control the length of time the two-line status appears in the on-

screen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION

parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-line

status in the display device screen.

Note:

When the display device is connected to a component video output

connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set

to OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.

MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel

displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Main

Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line

status indicates the current input, input source, listening mode and

volume level selected in the Main Zone.

ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 2 status

change. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the

current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.

DVD1 D VOL

FILM -34dB

DVD1 ANLG VOL

ZONE 2 -34dB

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-29

ZONE 3 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 3 status

change. The Zone 3 two-line status indicates the

current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 3.

TUNER STATUS

The Tuner status indicates the current frequency,

band, listening mode and volume level. The

Tuner status takes the place of the two-line status

display for inputs using the built-in tuner.

STATUS MENUS

Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu

for the current input source of the Main Zone, which contains

parameters that provide information about the current input source

and listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,

Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike most

other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened through the

selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 button

must be pressed.

To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input

source:

1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of the

STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the on-

screen and front-panel displays.

If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator

appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2

button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not

include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the

menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.

2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, press

the remote-control Menu  and  arrows to scroll upward and

downward through the complete list of available parameters.

Note:

STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current

input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu  arrow to close the

STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,

press the STAT2 button or the Menu  arrow again to close the

STATUS menu.

STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table

beneath each description lists the default and possible settings

for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions

begin on page 2-34. STATUS menu level meters are described

on page 2-35.

DVD1 ANLG VOL

ZONE3 -34dB

DVD1 90.9 FM

L7 MUSIC -34dB

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-30

2CH STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and

R level meters.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

D STATUS

Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features

L, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE ANLG, PCM

SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

-6

-15

-30

-45

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

CHANNELS 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

BIT RATE 32 to 640kbps

EX ENCODED MATRIX, NONE

SAMPLE RATE 48kHz

2.0 ENCODING MATRIX, NONE

DIALOG OFFSET –27 to +4dB

MIX ROOM SMALL, LARGE

CENTER MIX LVL –3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

SURR MIX LVL +0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

EX ENCODED

PG1

CSL

SR LFE

-6

-15

-30

-45

D STATUS

SAMPLE RATE

PG2

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-31

STATUS

Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,

SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a

6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel input

source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when

the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

CHANNELS 3/3.1, 3/2.1

BIT RATE 754.5 to 1509.7 kbps

ES ENCODING DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

WORD LENGTH 16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

STATUS

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

PG1

STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

ENCODING

PG1

CSLSRLFE

STATUS

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

PG2

-6

-15

-30

-45

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE 5.1a BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE 5.1a BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-32

2CH BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when

the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

DIGITAL STATUS

Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample

rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE 2CH BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

2CH BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE 2CH BYPASS

INPUT TYPE BYPASS

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE ---

SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

DIGITAL STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-33

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

LIVE! STATUS

Provides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and R

level meters.

See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE ANLG

SAMPLE RATE 96kHz

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE ANLG

96kHz

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT The current input

MODE The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE MIC

SAMPLE RATE 48kHz

2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

DVD1

LIVE! MED

MIC

48kHz

-6

-15

-30

-45

Basic Operation Lexicon

2-34

STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

2.0 ENCODING MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is

detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded

source is not detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect matrix

encoding in non-flagged input sources.

BIT RATE 32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps

Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit

rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding

process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to

640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to

1509.7 kbps.

CENTER MIX LVL –3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used

during the mixing process.

CHANNELS 3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The

first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit

after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.

The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low-

frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter setting

is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surround

channels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent to

the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.

Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,

3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) input

sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.

DIALOG OFFSET –27 to +4dB

Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.

Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full-

scale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incoming

signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the

amount of adjustment the RV-8 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.

ES ENCODING DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel

DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,

a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround-encoded back

channel is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a

standard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.

EX ENCODING MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded source

is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel

Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is

detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1-

channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround

EX encoding is detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.

RV-8 Basic Operation

2-35

INPUT

Indicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).

INPUT TYPE ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---

Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter

setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the

MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. When

the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audio

source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio

source is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphone

source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown

digital audio source is present.

MIX ROOM SMALL, LARGE

Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the

mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting the

RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is

recommended.

MODE

Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).

SAMPLE RATE 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.

SURR MIX LVL +0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during

the mixing process.

WORD LENGTH 16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.

STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS

Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating

input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left

(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB)

channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and

digital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digital

audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.

Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu,

depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appears

when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel source

is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when

the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and red

indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appear

in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-

screen background.

Setup

Setup..........................................................................................3-2

Input Setup.................................................................................3-4

Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup...........................................................................3-25

Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters....................................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration............................................................................. 3-36

Manual Calibration................................................................................. 3-53

I/O Config.................................................................................3-60

Display Setup............................................................................3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup....................................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68

Trigger Setup............................................................................3-70

Tuner Setup..............................................................................3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments............................................... 3-73

Lock Options.............................................................................3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION...................................................................3-80

Setup Lexicon

3-2

SETUP

Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.

INPUTS

Prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1) and opens the

corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change input

names, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred

listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-4 for more information.

SPEAKERS

Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the

Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup,

set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKER

SETUP” on page 3-25 for more information.

I/O CONFIG

Opens the I/O CONFIG menu, which is used to configure the analog

audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel

and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel

connectors. It can also be used to configure the amplifier outputs.

See “I/O CONFIGURATION” 3-60 for more information.

DISPLAYS

Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-

screen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization,

and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”

on page 3-63 for more information.

VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure

Main Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See

“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.

TRIGGER

Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the

trigger output connector labeled 1. See ”TRIGGER SETUP” on page

3-70 for more information.

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP INPUTS

SPEAKERSSETUP

I/O CONFIGSETUP

DISPLAYSSETUP

VOLUME CONTROLSSETUP

TRIGGERSETUP

RV-8 Setup

3-3

TUNER SETUP

Opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/

FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 for more information.

LOCK OPTIONS

Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE

ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from

accidental changes. For more information, see “Lock Options” on

page 3-79.

LIVE! CALIBRATION

Opens the LIVE! CALIBRATION menu, which is used to perform the

necessary calibration before using the LIVE! modes. See “LIVE!

CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for more information.

POWER MANAGEMENT ON, OFF

Opens the POWER MANAGEMENT menu, which is used to automat-

ically put the RV-8 into standby mode during brownouts.

When set to ON, the RV-8 detects low voltage levels or a momentary

loss of power and puts the device in standby mode. In the event of a

power brown out, the RV-8 will display a BROWN OUT!! PRESS

STANDBY message. To turn the unit back on, use the front panel

STANDYBY button.

When set to OFF, the RV-8 will attempt to function during a

momentary power loss, however software settings may become

corrupt and need to be reset.

When the RV-8 is in standby mode, pressing the button turns the

unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous

operating session.

TUNER SETUPSETUP

LOCK OPTIONSSETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATIONSETUP

POWER MANAGEMENTSETUP

Setup Lexicon

3-4

INPUT SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding

INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change the input name, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred listening modes and

configure advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,

regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.

The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.

INPUTSSETUP (INPUT) INPUT SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP

menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input can be substituted.

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-5

CHANGING INPUT NAMES

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default name

of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.

EDIT INPUT NAME

Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used to

customize the name of the selected input. Custom input names can

include up to eight characters.

To customize the name of the selected input:

1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT

NAME drop-down menu.

2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current input

name appears on the second line. Using the remote-control 

and  arrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been changed, press the  arrow

button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will

automatically wrap to the first character space when the last

character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name.

5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the  arrow

button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.

The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel

displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear in

the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against the

left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default input

name appears in parentheses against the right margin.

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

DVD1 INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

EDIT INPUT NAME

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 NAME EDIT INPUT NAME

Setup Lexicon

3-6

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-

default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control

input selection button labels.

To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:

1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the

INPUT NAME menu.

2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control 

and  arrow buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

option.

3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted, press

the  arrow button to select this option. The message “PRESS

MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears in the on-screen

and front-panel displays.

4. When this message appears, press the  arrow button to restore

the factory-default name of the selected input and close the

message. (Press the  arrow button to close the message

without restoring the factory-default name of the selected input.)

DVD1 INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

PRESS MENU V TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 NAME RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

RV-8 Setup

3-7

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phono

input, five composite video, five S-Video or three component video input connectors.

The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that

can be used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG

IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel analog audio input

levels for the selected input.

Note:

The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audio

input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources.

DIGITAL IN COAX-1 TO 4, OPTICAL-1 TO 4, NONE

Opens the DIGITAL IN menu, which is used to assign a digital audio

input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight config-

urable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight digital

audio input connectors.

Please note the following:

• When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8 will

automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT

parameter to ANALOG (see page 3-17).

• A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no

analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next page

for information about assigning an analog audio input

connector.

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Possible Settings

DIGITAL IN COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE

ANALOG IN ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO,

TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

ANLG IN LVL AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE

COMPONENT INCOMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 DIGITAL IN

Setup Lexicon

3-8

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)

ANALOG IN ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO, TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

Opens the ANALOG IN menu, which is used to assign an analog

audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight

configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight

analog audio input connectors.

The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configu-

ration of the analog audio input connectors.

• The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIG

menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60).

• The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIG

menu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).

• The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/O

CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see

page 3-61).

Please note the following:

• When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8

automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT

parameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-17).

• An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no

digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous

page for information about assigning a digital audio input

connector.

• The PHONO input corresponds to the built-in phono

connector.

• The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radio

tuner.

• LIVE! cannot be selected until LIVE! CALIBRATION is run. When

the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE!, the digital input selection is

disabled for this input until a different analog input is selected.

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

ANALOG-8

PHONO

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

5.1 ANLG (3-5)

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

TUNER

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

NONE

LIVE!

NONE

LIVE!

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTS

SETUP DVD1 ANALOG IN

RV-8 Setup

3-9

ANLG IN LVL AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu, which is used to adjust the 2-channel

analog audio input levels for the selected input. Despite attempts at

standardization, analog audio sources have a wide range of levels. To

compensate for this, the RV-8 allows independent input level

adjustment for each of its stereo and multichannel analog audio

input connectors, phono input and the internal tuner. Input level

adjustment is not available when analog bypass is on.

* This parameter cannot be adjusted.

Note:

Adjustments made in the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the analog

audio input connector assigned for the selected input, these adjustments

are automatically applied to the new connector.

OFF

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

AUTO GAIN

+0.0dB

+0.dB

MANUAL

-18 to +12dB

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

-6

-15

-30

-45

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

Parameter Possible Settings

AUTO ON, OFF

MANUAL –18 to +12dB

AUTO GAIN* –18 to +12dB

Setup Lexicon

3-10

ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)

AUTO ON, OFF

Provides automatic adjustment of analog audio input levels. When

set to ON, the RV-8 automatically monitors and optimizes input

levels. When the input signal is too high, the RV-8 quickly decreases

input levels to avoid overload. When the input signal is too low, the

RV-8 slowly increases input levels to maximize signal-to-noise ratio

and dynamic range.

When OFF is selected, the RV-8 does not automatically monitor and

optimize analog audio input levels. Rather, input levels must be

adjusted with the MANUAL parameter (see below).

MANUAL –18dB to +12dB

Provides manual adjustment of analog audio input levels. When

manual adjustments are made, the RV-8 automatically sets the ANLG

IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating automatic input

level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments are retained when

the AUTO parameter is ON.

Note:

When the AUTO parameter is ON, the RV-8 will not make adjustments

that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.

AUTO GAIN

Indicates the current amount of input level adjustment for the

selected analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN LVL menu

AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the

amount of automatic input level adjustment. When the AUTO

parameter is OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of

manual input level adjustment. (In other words, the AUTO GAIN

parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL

parameter.)

When the AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter

continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment

until automatic adjustments have been made.

LEVEL METERS

Indicate fluctuating input levels for the selected input. Like the

STATUS menu level meters, ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate

input levels for both analog and digital audio sources. However,

ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments affect only analog audio

sources.

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when

the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels; yellow indicates normal levels; and red

indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when

the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen background.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ANLG IN LVL MANUAL

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ANLG IN LVL AUTO GAIN

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

RV-8 Setup

3-11

VIDEO IN COMPOSITE-1 TO 5, S-VIDEO-1 TO 5, NONE

Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign a composite or

S-Video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight

configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its five

composite or five S-Video input connectors.

Note:

Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or

S-Video source is present.

S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is

present.

COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

Opens the COMPONENT IN menu, which is used to assign a

component video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8

has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any

of its three component video input connectors.

Alternatively, COMPONENT IN can be assigned to VIDEO. This will

cause the composite or S-Video signal selected for the VIDEO IN

parameter to be converted to component input. The NONE setting

shuts off the component output.

Note:

When the component is set to NONE, black and blue lines appear on the

screen if the monitor does not have auto-sense.

DVD1 VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

NONE

DVD1 COMPONENT IN

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

NONE

POWER MANAGEMENT

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 VIDEO IN INPUTSSETUP DVD1 COMPONENT IN

Setup Lexicon

3-12

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

Preferred listening modes can be pre-selected so that when a

particular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listening

mode is activated.

The RV-8 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone

input: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the right

indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to

select preferred listening modes.

Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes.

Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters

2-CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources

DSelects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources

5.1a Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sources

MIC

Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)

DVD1 2-CH MODE

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PLII +

PRO LOGIC

PL +

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

HEADPHONE

DVD1 D MODE

FILM

MUSIC

DIGITAL

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

HEADPHONE 5.1

DVD1 MODE

DVD1 MIC MODE

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

FILM

MUSIC

2-CHAN

HEADPHONE

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

USE LAST

DVD1 5.1a MODE

FILM

MUSIC

5.1a

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

HEADPHONE 5.1a

USE LAST

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-13

When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is

automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an

appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can

occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the

corresponding menus on 3-12):

If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the

L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is

played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)

source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.

Dynamic Listening Modes

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.

For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when

the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and source

material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic Listening

Modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode

button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below.

Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu

The RV-8 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for

each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening

modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do

not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes

under any circumstances are listed in the table below.

Dynamic modes

2-Channel Dolby Digital DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX

Dolby PLIIx MOV THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR

Dolby PLIIx MUS THX MUSIC DTS THX MUSIC

DTS NEO:6 + THX 5.1 PLIIx MOV DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM

DTS NEO:6 CIN 5.1 PLIIx MUS DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHAN

Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu

2-Channel Dolby Digital DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX THX MUSIC DTS THX MUSIC

Dolby PLIIx MOV 5.1 PLIIx MOV 5.1 MONO LOGIC

Dolby PLIIx MUS 5.1 PLIIx MUS 5.1 MONO SURR

DTS NEO:6 + THX 5.1 MONO

DTS NEO:6 CIN

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

Setup Lexicon

3-14

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)

The Use Last Parameter

When the RV-8 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected

input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces the

preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lost

when switching between inputs.

The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-8 software to

“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.

Once selected, that mode will always be active on the corresponding

input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the

following example:

1. Select

Main Menu



SETUP



INPUTS



DVD1



USE LAST

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Press the DVD-1 button.

4. Play a DTS input source.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.

6. Press the TV button

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display

identifies the preferred listening mode.

7. Press the DVD-1 button.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode

for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)

2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in

the SETUP menu.

When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and

the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening

mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can

always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether

or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set

and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the

input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when

switching between inputs.

When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a

dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input

setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when

switching between inputs, even when the RV-8 is set to standby as in

the following example:

1. Select

Main Menu



SETUP



INPUTS



DVD1

2-CH

USE LAST

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Press the DVD-1 button.

4. Play a 2-channel input source.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach PLIIx MOV.

PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.

6. Press the TV button

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display

identifies the preferred listening mode.

7. Press the DVD-1 button.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode

for the DVD1 input is still PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of

setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the

input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.

Note:

When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup

menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when

the RV-8 is set to standby.

RV-8 Setup

3-15

2-CH

Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-8 activates the

selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time

a 2-channel source was present

The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNEL

listening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USE

LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7

FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.

The RV-8 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6

listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was

present, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Since

the DTS NEO:6 listening modes are dynamic, they cannot be

selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.

DOLBY D

Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select a

preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-8

activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is

selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time

a Dolby Digital source was present

The RV-8 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode if

this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source

was present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, it

cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 2-CH INPUTSSETUP DVD1 D

Setup Lexicon

3-16

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)

Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-8 automatically

activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or

a new DTS(-ES) source is present.

When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:

• The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the

last time a DTS(-ES) source was present

• The RV-8 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was

activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. Since

DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot be

selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.

MIC

Opens the MIC MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for the LIVE! source. The RV-8 automatically activates

the preferred listening mode when a LIVE! input is selected.

When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode (LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED or

LIVE! LARGE) that was activated the last time a MIC source was

present.

5.1a

Opens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-8 automatically

activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog

source is present.

When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was

activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1a

MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1-

channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set to

USE LAST, the RV-8 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening mode

was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MIC

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 5.1a

RV-8 Setup

3-17

CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS

MAIN ADVANCED

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens

the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side

of this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The

settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings

differ from input to input.

INPUT SELECT DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input

connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUT

SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input

connector for the selected input. The table on page 3-19 describes

INPUT SELECT parameter settings.

Note:

When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-8 will not select

the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio

input source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals

(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is

powered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-8

automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.

DVD1 MAIN ADV

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

DIGITAL

OFF

AUTO

OFF

DIGITAL

ANGL

DMIX

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

OFF

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

LEGACY VIDEO

POWER MANAGEMENT

FORMAT DETECT FAST

NORMAL

FAST

Parameter Possible Settings

INPUT SELECT DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

ANLOG BYPASS ON, OFF

S-VIDEO 16:9 AUTO, OFF

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 ON, OFF

COMPONENT OSD ON, OFF

LEGACY VIDEO A, B

FORMAT DETECT NORMAL, FAST

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED INPUT SELECT

Setup Lexicon

3-18

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)

ANALOG BYPASS ON, OFF

When set to ON, the RV-8 passes the analog input signal to the Main

Zone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input is

sent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the

(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to the

FRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The

(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to the

SIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R and

REAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routes

the analog input signal through A/D conversion. This makes it

possible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes,

crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide

multichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected for

Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will be

available.

When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED 

INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOG

BYPASS is disabled.

Note:

If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will be

sent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.

S-VIDEO 16:9 AUTO, OFF

Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some

video sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-8 allows anamorphic video

input signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enabling

compatible display devices to automatically switch between

anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.

When OFF, the RV-8 prevents anamorphic video input signals from

passing through the S-Video switcher, preventing compatible

display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic

and non-anamorphic display modes.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED ANALOG BYPASS INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED S-VIDEO 16:9

RV-8 Setup

3-19

INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL ANALOG AUTO

The RV-8 sends the assigned digital audio

input connector to the Main Zone audio

output connectors. The RV-8 ignores the

assigned analog audio input connector.

Note the following:

• The digital audio input connectors

are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and

DTS(-ES) sources.

• The digital audio input connectors

are not compatible with MPEG or

MP3 sources. If an incompatible

digital audio source (e.g., MPEG or

MP3) is present, the RV-8 automati-

cally selects the assigned analog

audio input connector.

• The RV-8 automatically sets the

INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL

when the ANALOG IN parameter is

set to NONE.

• If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, the

RV-8 will mute.

•The DIGITAL IN parameter can be

used to assign a digital audio input

connector for the selected input.

The RV-8 sends the assigned analog audio input

connector to the Main Zone audio output

connectors. The RV-8 ignores the digital audio

input connector.

Note the following:

• The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT

SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the

DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.

• The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to

assign an analog audio input connector

for the selected input.

The RV-8 toggles between sending the assigned

digital and analog audio input connectors to the

Main Zone audio output connectors, based on the

input source that is present.

For example:

• When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital or

DTS(-ES) source is present, the RV-8

automatically selects the assigned digital

audio input connector.

•When an SACD

TM source is present, the RV-

8 automatically selects the assigned analog

audio input connector.

Note the following:

• The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT

parameter to AUTO when both digital and

analog audio input connectors are assigned.

• When no compatible digital source is

present, the RV-8 automatically selects the

assigned analog audio input connector.

• The AUTO setting is recommended for

components that generate both digital and

analog input signals, such as DVD/SACD

players.

Setup Lexicon

3-20

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 ON, OFF

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display

device is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set to

ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect

ratio, regardless of the incoming signal.

Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the

picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and

width of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A

16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice as

wide as it is high.

When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in the

same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.

Note:

The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display

device screen when all of the following conditions are present:

• The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.

• An anamorphic video input signal is present.

• A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Video

output connector.

COMPONENT OSD ON, OFF

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display

device is connected to the component video output connector.

When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i

video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewing

distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen

display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen

display, including the two-line status.

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF,

the display device using the component video output connector will not

show the on-screen display.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED S-VIDEO OSD 4-3

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED COMPONENT OSD

RV-8 Setup

3-21

LEGACY VIDEO A, B

When video played back from a VCR is converted to component

video by the RV-8, the resulting picture quality depends on both the

quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component

display device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, A

and B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination of

the VCR and display device.

Note:

Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a

satisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may be

achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.

FORMAT DETECT NORMAL, FAST

Controls how the RV-8 reacts when it detects silence in the digital

audio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silence

when switching between sources.

When set to NORMAL, the RV-8 will not mute when silence is

detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.

When set to FAST, the RV-8 will mute when approximately 2ms of

continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,

the RV-8 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. This

prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal

changes. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.

Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format

changes.

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input

connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUP

menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input

connector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.

The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.

Note

When using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX.

When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizes

DTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs

loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.

For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:

1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.

2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG.

3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the

corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-8.

The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and the

analog connectors for Zone 2.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED LEGACY VIDEO

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 MAIN ADVANCED FORMAT DETECT

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 IN

Setup Lexicon

3-22

ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL ANLG (Analog) DMIX (Downmix)

• The RV-8 automatically sets

the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DIGITAL when the ANALOG

IN parameter is set to NONE.

• The RV-8 sends the assigned

DIGITAL IN connector

specified in the INPUT SETUP

menu to the ZONE 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

• Only PCM digital input

sources are compatible with

ZONE 2 analog audio

outputs. Dolby Digital and

DTS sources are compatible

with the Zone 2 digital audio

output when the DIG BYPASS

parameter is set to ON.

• Audio will not be available in

Zone 2 analog outputs when

a Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) or

unknown digital input source

is present.

• The ANALOG IN connector

specified in the INPUT SETUP

menu is sent to the ZONE 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

• Only Front L/R Audio will be

available in Zone 2 when one

of the 5.1 analog inputs is

selected for the Main Zone.

• Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed

version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output

connectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.

• To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in

the Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio

output connectors will mute.

• Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio

output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening

mode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output

connectors will generate mono output signals.

• It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in

Dolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo®

or Replay TV®).

• A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to

the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS.

Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and

5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the input

that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main

Zone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG and

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot be

generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in

the Main Zone.

RV-8 Setup

3-23

ZONE2 ADVANCED

Opens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced

ANLG IN LVL -18 to +12dB

Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent

to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-8 applies these

adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2

digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted

when an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter

from overloading.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

+0dB

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

MIC

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

ANLG IN LVL

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

5.1a FILM

5.1a

INPUT SETUP

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Possible Settings

ANLG IN LVL -18dB to + 12dB

DIGITAL BYPASS ON, OFF

DIG OUT RATE 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

RECORD BLOCKED, ENABLED

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED ANLG IN LVL

Setup Lexicon

3-24

DIGITAL BYPASS ON, OFF

Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.

When ON is selected, the RV-8 passes digital input signals directly to

the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the original

format of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send a

multichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. When

OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, Dolby

Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio

outputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-8

will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio output

connectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will be

sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.

DIG OUT RATE 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2

digital audio output connectors.

When a value is selected, the RV-8 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters at

the selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE

parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format

that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).

Note:

DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change the

sample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.

RECORD BLOCKED, ENABLED

Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is

selected, the RV-8 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to

prevent feedback loops. However, the RV-8 still passes video input

signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED is

selected, the RV-8 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2

audio and video output connectors.

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED DIGITAL BYPASS

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED DIG OUT RATE

INPUTSSETUP DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED RECORD

RV-8 Setup

3-25

SPEAKER SETUP

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eight

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens

the CROSSOVER SETUP menu, which is used to configure a custom

or THX setup.

Note:

It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or

LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated out-

put levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.

SPEAKERSSETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

POWER MANAGEMENT

SPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS

Setup Lexicon

3-26

CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points for

each Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz

range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.

To configure a custom speaker setup:

• Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of

the associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/R

parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency

rating of the front speakers.

• Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest

crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if

CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set

the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover

point of the other speakers.

In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from

speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the

lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover point

are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL,

low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirected

to the subwoofer.

Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other

speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUB

crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Making

this selection can result in excessive bass.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGES

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

40 Hz

60 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

40 Hz

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-27

In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Low-

frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequency

signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.

Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph

above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the

curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.

High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph

above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the

curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not

show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.

High-Pass Filter Low-Pass Filter

Setup Lexicon

3-28

THX SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure the Main

Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which

indicates that pressing the arrow button will automatically configure

the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use

THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:

•Press thearrow button to configure the Main Zone audio

output connectors for a THX speaker setup. The THX SETUP

menu will open on the in-screen display.

•Press thearrow button to close the message without config-

uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX

speaker setup.

When a THX speaker setup is selected, the RV-8 applies a THX 80Hz

crossover point with a 12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R, Center,

Side L/R and Rear L/R output connectors. The RV-8 applies a THX

80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to the Subwoofer

output connector.

Notes:

• A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening

modes.

• In the THX SETUP menu, only the REAR L/R, THX ULTRA2 SUB,

BGC and ASA parameters can be changed.

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

THX 80 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER*

BGC

ASA

THX 80 Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE RIGHT

BUTTON WILL

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION

* These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-29

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for config-

uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker

setup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and

THX SETUP menus.

Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of

the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on

one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically

adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setup

is selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are

set to THX 80Hz.

* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.

† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP or

SPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUPSET CROSSOVERS SET CROSSOVERS

Parameter

CUSTOM SETUP Menu THX SETUP Menu

Default Setting Possible Settings Default Setting Possible Settings

FRONT L/R* 80Hz FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz THX 80Hz THX 80Hz

CENTER* 80Hz FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz

SIDE L/R* 80Hz FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz

REAR L/R 80Hz FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz, NONE

SUBWOOFER* 80Hz FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE THX 80Hz THX 80Hz

THX ULTRA2 SUB OFF ON, OFF OFF ON, OFF

BGC N/A† ON, OFF N/A† ON, OFF

ASA APART APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER APART APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

Setup Lexicon

3-30

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

40Hz

60Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

40Hz

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

SUBWOOFER

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

REAR L/R SPEAKERS

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

SIDE L/R SPEAKERS FRONT L/R SPEAKERSCENTER SPEAKER

NONE

FULL + SUB FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

FULL + SUB FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

FULL + SUB FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

FULL + SUB

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-31

FRONT L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front

L/R output connectors.

•Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-

frequency rating of the front speakers.

•Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB

option can result in excessive bass.

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

applied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/R

parameter cannot be adjusted.

CENTER FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONE

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER

output connector.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-

frequency rating of the center speaker.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center

speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (The

set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper

range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can

result in excessive bass.

• When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, select

NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R output

connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. In

this case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/

SACD player to redirect center channel signals.

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

applied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parameter

cannot be adjusted.

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP FRONT L/RSET CROSSOVERS

SPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP CENTERSET CROSSOVERS

SPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP

Setup Lexicon

3-32

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

SIDE L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

•Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-

frequency rating of the side speakers.

•Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option

can result in excessive bass.

• When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, select

NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R output

connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the

RV-8 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/R

output connectors.

Note:

When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround

EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASA

parameter and PLIIx modes are not available.

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

applied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and the SIDE L/R

parameter cannot be adjusted.

REAR L/R FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

• Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the low-

frequency rating of the rear speakers.

• Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option

can result in excessive bass.

• When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select

NONE

to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. If

the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-8 redirects

surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.

Note:

When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,

THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASA

parameter are not available.

When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens

which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.

To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a

7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate the

Rear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio output

connectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP SIDE L/RSET CROSSOVERS

SPEAKERSSETUP SET CROSSOVERS THX SETUP

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP REAR L/RSET CROSSOVERS

SPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUPSET CROSSOVERS

RV-8 Setup

3-33

SUBWOOFER FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-8 sends a full-range

audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-8 activates a

crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal to

the lowest setting of the other speakers.

Note:

When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signals

will not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. To

redirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with the

associated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

SETUP

INPUTS

SUBWOOFER

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

40Hz

60Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

40Hz

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

60Hz

40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

POWER MANAGEMENT

SPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUP SUBWOOFERSET CROSSOVERS

Setup Lexicon

3-34

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

THX ULTRA2 SUB ON, OFF

Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone

audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Select

the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and the

OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. When

set to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can

be used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the

BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGERS

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

40 Hz

60 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

40 Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER CONFIGURATION

OFF

APART

TOGETHER

* These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

THX 80Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER*

BGC

ASA

THX 80Hz

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

60Hz

40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP or

ULTRA2 SUB SPEAKERSSETUP THX SETUP ULTRA2 SUB

RV-8 Setup

3-35

BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION) ON, OFF

Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX

SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When the

BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all

audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When set

to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio

output connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THX

ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compen-

sation cannot be adjusted.

Note:

BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the

proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.

ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY) APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear

speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening

modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recom-

mended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which the

rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the

listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1

THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX

MUSIC listening mode is activated.

Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear

speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the

distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but

less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance

between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).

Note:

ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are

present.

When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and

5-channel playback:

• ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.

• The RV-8 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2

and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.

BGC

THX SETUP

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP BGC

SPEAKERSSETUP ASA

THX SETUP

SPEAKERSSETUP CUSTOM SETUP ASA

SPEAKERSSETUP

Setup Lexicon

3-36

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

The RV-8 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.

A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.

Automatic Options Details

MICROPHONE CHECK • Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.

• Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors,

allowing the RV-8 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.

• Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual

microphone levels.

DISTANCES & LEVELS • Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.

• Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances

and output levels.

• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening

position and the speaker.

• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output

levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

DISTANCES • Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.

• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the

desired values.

• Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening

position and the speaker.

LEVELS • Activates automatic calibration of output levels.

• Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired

values.

• Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output

levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

RV-8 Setup

3-37

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

CAUTION!

• The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit

require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically

abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or

irreparable damage to the microphones.

• The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not

sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

• Never make or break microphone input connections unless

the RV-8 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,

OR standby mode is activated with the front-panel or

remote control standby button.

Note the following:

• Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the

Lexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.

Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than

those in the kit will produce unpredictable results.

• Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the

desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to

the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included

in this section.

• It is important to read and observe the care and handling

documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to

ensure optimal microphone performance.

• If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or

speaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recali-

bration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.

To connect the microphones:

4. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off OR in standby mode.

5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit

to the microphone input connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Make

sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid

connection.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be

referred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to which

the microphone is connected. You should label the micro-

phones for troubleshooting purposes.

6. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

Setup Lexicon

3-38

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK

Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.

During the microphone check, position

the microphones:

3As close together as possible

3Relatively centered between and equidistant from

the front left and right speakers

3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement during the microphone

check. All of the microphones are positioned as close

together as possible in an unobstructed location that is

equidistant from the front left and right speakers.

PROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

RV-8 Setup

3-39

During the microphone check, DO NOT:

7Separate the microphones

7Scatter the microphones throughout the listening

space

7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the micro-

phones and the speakers

7Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and

other fixtures, where echoes might obscure

calibration noise signals

7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are scattered throughout the

listening space rather than positioned as close together as

possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left

and right speakers.

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Setup Lexicon

3-40

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES

Note the following:

• The RV-8 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments

until the microphones detect the required level. If the

calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the  arrow

button to cancel the microphone check.

• Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume

level, you should set all volume controls for associated compo-

nents (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to a

reasonable level before performing automatic calibration.

When the procedure is finished, the RV-8 automatically reverts

to the last volume level that was selected before automatic

calibration began.

• During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screen

display instead of the front-panel display, as additional infor-

mation and instructions are available in the on-screen display.

1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option,

as shown above.

2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screen

display, indicating the importance of proper microphone

placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.

3. Press the  arrow button to begin the microphone check. The

following screens appears in the on-screen display as the micro-

phone check is performed:

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

Appears in the on-screen display while

the RV-8 determines the relative noise

level of the listening space and the

internal noise level of the microphones.

After eliminating microphones that are

not detected or not functioning, the RV-8 calculates an average

level for all microphones.

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

CHECK MICROPHONES

GROUP MICROPHONES

INTO A BUNDLE IN THE

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MIDDLE OF THE ROOM

PRESS TO BEGIN

MIC CHECK

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

CUSTOM SETUP

CHECK MICROPHONES

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

PLEASE WAIT

RV-8 Setup

3-41

CHECKING MICROPHONES

Appears in the on-screen display while

the RV-8 confirms the microphone level

calculated during the silence check. To

do this, the RV-8 sends alternating

calibration noise signals to the front left

and right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments

until the microphones detect the required level. If the signal

becomes too loud, press the  arrow button to cancel the

microphone check.

The RV-8 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate micro-

phones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too

high. Then, the RV-8 determines the appropriate output level for

the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.

CHECK MICROPHONES Results

Appears in the on-screen display when the RV-8 is finished

checking the microphones. This display indicates the individual

check results for each microphone.

• An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the

microphone check.

• An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass

the microphone check.

4. Press the  and  arrow buttons to highlight the desired micro-

phone parameter. The RV-8 refers to the microphones according

to the input connector to which the microphone is connected.

5. Press the  arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at the

bottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.

Refer to the table on the next page for information about all

possible microphone check messages.

Note the following:

• The RV-8 retains the calculated microphone level until the

SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed,

another microphone check is required before automatic

calibration can be performed.

• Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are

available. Perform automatic calibration with two microphones

that have passed the microphone check.

However, the RV-8 will perform automatic calibration as long as

at least one microphone passes the microphone check. In this

circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in the

primary listening position.

• If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect the

microphones from the microphone input connectors. If the

microphones are disconnected, you should perform the micro-

phone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.

CUSTOM SETUP

CHECK MICROPHONES

CHECKING MICROPHONES

PLEASE WAIT

CHECK MICROPHONES

MIC 1

(MICROPHONE)

MIC 2

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

ERROR

Setup Lexicon

3-42

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES (continued)

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired

automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines

whether the RV-8 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output

levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a

single row, or several listening positions in the listening space.

• Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the

next page to position the microphones for automatic

calibration. Select the microphone placement that best meets

the needs of the listening space.

Message Description Troubleshooting

The microphone detected the calibration

noise signal without error. •N/A

The RV-8 did not detect the microphone

during the silence check. • Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The RV-8 detected the microphone dur-

ing the silence check. However, the

microphone level determined during the

silence check was not confirmed during

the microphone check.

• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

• The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone

placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are appropri-

ately positioned for the microphone check.

• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The microphone level is more than 20dB

below the highest microphone level. • Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

• The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the micro-

phone placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are

appropriately positioned for the microphone check.

• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The microphone level could not be

determined because of excessive room

noise in the listening space.

• Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners

and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.

• The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

RV-8 Setup

3-43

When calibrating for a single listening

position, place the microphones:

3As close together as possible in a single listening

position (the primary listening position)

3At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for a

single listening position. The microphones are

positioned as close together as possible in a single

listening position, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal

speaker distances and output levels for that position.

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Setup Lexicon

3-44

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

When calibrating for multiple listening

positions in a single row, position the

microphones:

3At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for

multiple listening positions in a single row. Each micro-

phone is positioned in a single listening position within a

single row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal

speaker distances and output levels for that row at the

expense of a single listening position.

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

RV-8 Setup

3-45

When calibrating for multiple listening

positions in multiple rows, position the

microphones:

3At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

3In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

3In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for

multiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each micro-

phone is positioned in a single listening position within a

row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker

distances and output levels for a larger listening area at

the expense of a single listening position.

PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Setup Lexicon

3-46

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

During the automatic calibration, do not:

7Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of

the listening positions or space

7Position the microphones in spots where the

listeners’ heads will not be during listening

7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the

microphones and the speakers

7Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture

and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure

calibration noise signals

7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are positioned on the floor

along the perimeter of the listening space, making it

difficult for the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker

distances and output levels for the actual listening

positions.

IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

RV-8 Setup

3-47

During the automatic calibration, do not:

7Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of

the listening positions or space

7Position the microphones at spots where the

listeners’ heads will not be during listening

7Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the

microphones and the speakers

7Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture

and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure

calibration noise signals

7Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are positioned on seat cushions

rather than in spots where the listener’s heads will be

during listening.

IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Microphone

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Setup Lexicon

3-48

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES & LEVELS

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS TEST WILL BEGIN IN

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.

• If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Press

the or arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the arrow button to select

this option. Refer to the table on page 3-36 for more information about automatic calibration options.

• If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicat-

ing that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.

If this occurs, go back to “Connecting the Microphones” on page 3-37 and work your way back to this page.

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

NO MICROPHONE

DETECTED

The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:

• The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the sig-

nals become too loud, press the arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

menu.

• The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time

to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration

results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the arrow button to

skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.

RV-8 Setup

3-49

STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS

This step does not occur when the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is

selected.

This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0dB

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates speaker distances.

• During speaker distance calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone

audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor auto-

matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter

while the RV-8 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter,

the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

• Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker dis-

tance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-8 does not

send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead,

the RV-8 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.

These distances can be manually adjusted. See “PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRA-

TION” on page 3-54.

The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates output levels.

• During speaker levels calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone

audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor auto-

matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parame-

ter while the RV-8 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each

parameter, the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the param-

eter label.

Setup Lexicon

3-50

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

Refer to the table on page

3-52 for information about

all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

FRONT LEFT

Refer to the table on page

3-52 for information about

all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

If there was a DISTANCES calibration

error, an AUTO DISTANCES menu auto-

matically displays.

• A value indicates that no errors occurred

during the calibration procedure.

• An ERROR message indicates that a value

was calculated, but at least one error

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

• Press the or arrow button to high-

light the speaker calibration parameter

you want. Then press the button to

view more detailed results for the

selected speaker. A message similar to

the one shown above will display.

• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-

mation about all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

• This menu is displayed, but not user

accessible during Auto Distance Calibra-

tion or after Auto Calibration.

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating

speaker distances and output levels, if there

was a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP screen is displayed, indicating the

results for each calibration procedure.

• An OK message indicates that no errors

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

• An ERROR message indicates that values

were calculated, but at least one error

occurred during calibration.

• Press the or arrow button to high-

light the desired calibration procedure.

DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS-

TANCES screen shown in the left column

of this table.

LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen

shown in the right column of this table.

• Press the arrow button to select this

procedure.

• Refer to the instructions in the appropri-

ate column to view more detailed results

for each individual speaker.

• If a speaker is highlighted in either the

Distances or Levels menus, the speaker

name is displayed.

If there was a LEVELS calibration error, an

AUTO LEVELS menu automatically dis-

plays.

• A value indicates that no errors occurred

during the calibration procedure.

• An ERROR message indicates that a value

was calculated, but at least one error

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

•Press theor arrow button to high-

light the desired speaker calibration

parameter. Then, press the arrow

button to view more detailed results for

the selected speaker. A message similar

to the one shown above will display.

• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-

mation about all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

• This menu is displayed, but not user

accessible during Auto Distance Calibra-

tion or after Auto Calibration.

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES

LEVELS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

ERROR

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A



RV-8 Setup

3-51

STEP DISTANCES DISTANCES & LEVELS LEVELS

AUTO DISTANCES*

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

SET DISTANCES

Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select

the desired speaker distances.

1 Press the arrow button to return to

the SET DISTANCES menu.

2 Press the or arrow button to tog-

gle between calibrated speaker distances

(AUTO) and original speaker distances.

The speaker graphics at the bottom of

the menu update to indicate the selected

values.

3 Press the button to apply the

selected values. A confirmation message

is displayed to indicate the applied val-

ues.

4 Press the button twice in succession

to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessi-

ble after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibra-

tion is performed as a combined procedure.

Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to

select speaker distances or levels.

1 Press the arrow button to return to the

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.

2 To select the other calibration procedure,

follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise,

press the button to return to the

SPEAKER SETUP menu.

*Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown

above as an example. The AUTO LEVELS

screen can be substituted.

Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the

desired speaker levels.

1 Press the arrow button to return to

the SET LEVELS menu.

•Press theand arrow buttons to

toggle between calibrated output levels

(AUTO) and original output levels. The

speaker graphics at the bottom of the

menu update to indicate the selected

values.

•Press the

arrow button to apply the

selected values. A confirmation message is

displayed to indicate the applied values.

• Press the arrow button twice in suc-

cession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP

menu.

The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible

after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is

performed as a combined procedure.

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES

LEVELS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

ERROR

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

SET LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB



Setup Lexicon

3-52

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

Message Description Troubleshooting

The RV-8 successfully calibrated the value

for the selected speaker without error. •N/A

The selected speaker is not present in the

speaker setup. • Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected

speaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-8 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in

the speaker setup.)

The microphones detected out-of-phase

calibration noise signals, but the cali-

brated value is still accurate.

• Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.

• Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-8 does not report this error unless at

least half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.

• Reflections from room objects could cause this error.

• Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually low level. • The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a

location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages

3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

The microphones did not detect calibra-

tion noise signals or the RV-8 could not

calculate a value.

• Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the

microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

One or more microphones did not detect

calibration noise signals at a reasonable

level. The calibrated value could be inac-

curate.

• Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the

microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually high level. • Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

• The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.

Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the micro-

phones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually low level. • Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

• The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from the

selected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm

that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

RV-8 Setup

3-53

MANUAL CALIBRATION

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances and

output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.

Manual Options Details

SPEAKER DISTANCES • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.

INTERNAL NOISE TEST • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

• Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector,

allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST • Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

• Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

• Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.

BASS PEAK LIMITERS • Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.

• Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

CUSTOM SETUP 40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Setup Lexicon

3-54

PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speaker

distances.

To manually calibrate speaker distances:

1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKER

SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu

shown above will open in the on-screen display.

2. Press the or arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker

distance parameter. Then, press the arrow button to select the

highlighted speaker distance parameter.

3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the

distance between the primary listening position and the front of

the speaker.

For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,

measure the distance between the primary listening position

and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main

Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).

4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the 

and arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available

value.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCES

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CUSTOM SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

0.0ft

FEET

METERS

FEET

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Setup

3-55

PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manually

calibrate output levels.

Note the following:

• Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrate

output levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative

loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level

calibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailers

such as Radio Shack.

• Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening

position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location

where the listener’s head will be during listening.

• Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker

setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These

output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, but

there is no need to do so.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

INTERNAL NOISE

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUPSPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CUSTOM SETUP

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

CUSTOM SETUP

SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

-18.0 to +12.0dB

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

POWER MANAGEMENT

Setup Lexicon

3-56

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,

which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration

noise signals.

When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:

•Press thearrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL

ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically

begins.

•Press thebutton to skip the internal noise test.

During the internal noise test, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals

to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level param-

eters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-8 sends the calibration

noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noise

signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.

Note:

When the internal noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets

volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while

the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

3. Press the or arrow button to highlight the desired output

level parameter. Then, quickly press the button to select this

output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on the

previous page will open in the on-screen display and automatic

scrolling will stop.

Note:

During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level

parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the

next parameter, causing the RV-8 to send the calibration noise

signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.

4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the or  button

to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading

from the primary listening position.

5. Press  to close the parameter. The internal noise test will

continue and automatic scrolling will resume.

6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have

been set.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION INTERNAL NOISE TEST

RV-8 Setup

3-57

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,

which manually calibrates output levels.

The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as

an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted,

the RV-8 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone

input source. Refer to the table below for more information about

external noise test listening mode activation.

When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, all

custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. The

listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its

factory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, the

listening mode returns to its custom condition.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

will only load when side and rear speakers are present.

**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker

setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section

beginning on page 6-4 for more information.

**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for the

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”.

Note:

When the external noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets

volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while

the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

3. Press the  or  arrow button to highlight the output level

parameter you want. Then press the button to select this

output level parameter.

The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3-55 is displayed.

4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the 

or  arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB

SPL Meter reading.

5. After selecting the output level, press the arrow button to close

the horizontal bar graph.

6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you

want.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

INPUT SOURCE LISTENING MODE

2-Channel PLII MOVIE, PLIIx MOVIE*

Dolby Digital DIGITAL**

DTS(-ES) *

5.1-Channel Analog 5.1a BYPASS***

Setup Lexicon

3-58

SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS

The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone

audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-8 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding

a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output

levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting

to reproduce low-frequency signals.

Note:

Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether

output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.

CAL NOISE ON, OFF

Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or

external calibration source.

To set the CAL NOISE parameter:

• Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set

bass peak limiters.

• Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.

Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires

an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

BASS PEAK LIMITER

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

100dB

OFF

75 to 120dB

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default Setting Possible Setting

CAL NOISE ON ON, OFF

LIMITER ON ON, OFF

LIMIT ADJ 100dB 75 to 120dB

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

RV-8 Setup

3-59

LIMITER ON, OFF

Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to

other speakers.

To set the LIMITER parameter:

•Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequency

signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

•Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,

regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

LIMIT ADJ 75 to 120dB

Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector,

and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which low-

frequency signals are redirected.

To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:

1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.

The parameter initially sets to 75dB.

2. Press the  and  arrow buttons to change the parameter value.

The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER

parameter is set to ON.

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS

LIMITER

SPEAKERSSETUP MANUAL LEVELS CALIBRATION BASS PEAK LIMITERS

LIMITER ADJ

Setup Lexicon

3-60

I/O CONFIG

The I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereo

connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel

configurations.

8 STEREO INPUTS

Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio

input connectors as eight stereo connectors.

When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:

• All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo

connectors.

• The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.

• Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1

ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3

and 6, respectively.

I/O CONFIGSETUP

REAR PANEL CONFIG

8 STEREO INPUTS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

I/O CONFIGSETUP 8 STEREO INPUTS

ANALOG INPUTS

RV-8 Setup

3-61

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio input connectors as five stereo

connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five

stereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:

• The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured as

stereo connectors.

• The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel

connector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output

connectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next

column.

• Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors

labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector

labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be

used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo

connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two

stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:

• The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.

• The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1-

channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are

configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are

sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in

the table at the bottom of this column.

• 2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors

labeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector

labeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assigned

to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the

5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel

connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog

sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main

Zone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.

I/O CONFIGSETUP 5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

ANALOG INPUTS

Input Connector Output Connector

(L) Front L

(R) Front R

(SUB) Sub

(LS) Side L and Rear L

(RS) Side R and Rear R

I/O CONFIGSETUP 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

ANALOG INPUTS

Setup Lexicon

3-62

I/O CONFIG (continued)

MAIN 7.1

When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel

will be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 are

used for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input

source selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning

message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will

be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 setting

is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing

any other button will cancel the change.

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input

source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning

message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will

be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 setting

is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing

any other button will cancel the change.

AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

I/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 7.1

AMP INPUTS

I/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

AMP INPUTS

I/O CONFIGSETUP MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

AMP INPUTS

RV-8 Setup

3-63

DISPLAY SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays,

restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.

DISPLAYSSETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

OFF, 1 to 60ms

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default

Setting Possible Setting

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY Refer to page 3-64

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY Refer to page 3-66

A/V SYNC DELAY OFF OFF, 1 to 60ms

CUSTOM NAME OFF ON, OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME N/A N/A

Setup Lexicon

3-64

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP

Opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.

STATUS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF

Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zone

video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen display

remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen display

appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-8

receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display

remains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREEN

DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS

OFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-panel

display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

2 SECONDS

TOP

NTSC

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

STATUS 2 SECONDS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

ALWAYS OFF

POSITION TOP TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

FORMAT NTSC SECAM, PAL, NTSC

BACKGROUND ON ON, OFF

DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY STATUS

RV-8 Setup

3-65

POSITION TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display

device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near the

top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-line

status is centered on the display device screen. When set to

BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the display

device screen. Refer to page 2-28 for more information about the

two-line status.

FORMAT SECAM, PAL, NTSC

Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the

video switcher and the display device. Select the setting that is

compatible with the source components and display device.

Note:

The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video output

connectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.

BACKGROUND ON, OFF

Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,

on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background

(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screen

display menus appear over the video input signal.

Note:

When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display

will disappear if the display device is using the component video output

connector.

DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY POSITION

DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY FORMAT

DISPLAYSSETUP ON-SCREEN DISPLAY BACKGROUND

Setup Lexicon

3-66

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUP

Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.

STATUS ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF

Activates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYS

ON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2

SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the

input source changes or the RV-8 receives a command. When set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.

Note:

When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the on-

screen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2

SECONDS.

BRIGHTNESS 100%,75%, 50%, 25%

Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When a

setting is selected, front-panel display illumination automatically

adjusts to the selected brightness.

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

100%

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

BRIGHTNESS ALWAYS ON

100%

75%

50%

25%

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

STATUS ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

ALWAYS OFF

BRIGHTNESS 100% 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%

DISPLAYSSETUP FRONT PANEL DISPLAY STATUS DISPLAYSSETUP FRONT PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

RV-8 Setup

3-67

A/V SYNC DELAY OFF, 1 to 60ms

Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as

video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parameter

can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video

signal delay.

CUSTOM NAME ON, OFF

Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when the

RV-8 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls across

the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-8 is

activated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP

menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be

used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter is

set to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and front-

panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

To customize the name of the RV-8:

1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT

CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.

2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, press

the remote control  and  arrow buttons to change the

character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been selected, press the  arrow

button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will

automatically wrap to the first character space when the last

character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.

5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the

 arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down

menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.

DISPLAYSSETUP A/V SYNC DELAY

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

OFF, 1 to 60ms

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

OFF ON

OFF EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DISPLAYSSETUP CUSTOM NAME

DISPLAYSSETUP EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Setup Lexicon

3-68

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.

MAIN PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the

Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone

activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous

operating session.

MUTE LEVEL –40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTE

Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the

front-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULL

MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, Main

Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.

Z2 PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is

activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume level

that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is

displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone

2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

-30dB

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

LOCK OPTIONS

Z2 PWR ON -30dB

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

ZONE PWR ON

-30dB

MAX VOL +12dB

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

HEADPHONE -30dB

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

-30dB

Z2 PWR ON -30dB

HEADPHONE -30dB

MAX VOLUME +12dB MAX VOLUME +12dB

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default

Setting Possible Settings

MAIN PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

MUTE LEVEL –30dB –40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL

Z2 PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Z3 PWR ON –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

HEADPHONE –30dB LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

MAX VOLUME –12dB –80 to +12dB

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MAIN PWR ON

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MUTE LEVEL

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS ZONE PWR ON

RV-8 Setup

3-69

Z3 PWR ON LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is

activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume level

that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is

displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone

3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

HEADPHONE LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever

headphones are plugged in to the RV-8. When set to LAST LVL, the

headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected

when they were last plugged in. When the headphones are

unplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.

MAX VOLUME -80 TO +12dB

Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a value

is selected, the RV-8 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the

selected value when the current level is higher.

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS ZONE PWR ON

SETUP VOLUME CONTROLS MAX VOLUME

Setup Lexicon

3-70

TRIGGER SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the

TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be used

to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-8

rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. The

connector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector

– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is activated,

and deactivated when the RV-8 is deactivated. The trigger

output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or

program operation.

REMOTE ONLY ON, OFF

Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote

operation. When set to ON, this connector is configured for

remote operation. The remote control play and stop buttons

turns the trigger on and off. The RV-8 ignores all other

TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF,

the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for

remote operation. It can be configured for program operation.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

REMOTE ONLY ON ON, OFF

Program Operation OFF ON, OFF

TRIGGERSETUP

MAIN MENU SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu

listening mode names

are fixed, meaning

these names do not

change when certain

encoding is present. For

instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode

label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Sur-

round EX, or no encod-

ing is engaged.

LOCK OPTIONS

TRIGGER SETUP OFF

MUSIC OFF

OFF

2-CHAN OFF

5.1a FILM OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a SurEX OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a STANDARD OFF

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS OFF

2CH BYPASS OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1 OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL OFF

LIVE! MED OFF

LIVE! LARGE OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY ON

DVD1 OFF

DVD2 OFF

SAT OFF

VCR OFF

TV OFF

CD OFF

TUNER OFF

PHONO OFF

ZONE2 INPUTS OFF

ZONE3 INPUTS OFF

FILM OFF

TV OFF

MUSIC OFF

MUSIC SURR OFF

PLIIx + THX OFF

PLIIx MOV OFF

PLIIx MUS OFF

PLII+ THX OFF

PLII MOVIE OFF

PLII MUSIC OFF

PL + THX OFF

PRO LOGIC OFF

+ THX OFF

CIN OFF

MUSIC OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF

CONCERT HHALL OFF

CHURCH OFF

CATHEDRAL OFF

PANORAMA OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO OFF

5.1 FILM OFF

5.1 TV OFF

5.1 MUSIC OFF

SurEX OFF

MUSIC OFF

5.1 PLIIx MOV OFF

5.1 PLIIx MUS OFF

DIGITAL EX OFF

5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR OFF

5.1 MONO OFF

FILM OFF

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TRIGGERSETUP REMOTE ONLY

RV-8 Setup

3-71

PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS ON, OFF

Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for

program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters–

except the REMOTE ONLY parameter–are considered

program operation parameters. The connector can be

associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the

same time.

When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and

program operation parameters are set to ON, the trigger

output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corre-

sponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modes

or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated

with individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated

with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured for

program operation, the connector is activated when the

corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected

and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and

listening modes are deselected.

Note:

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to

restore the factory default version of the selected listening

mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening

mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.

TRIGGERSETUP (PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)

MAIN MENU SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu

listening mode names

are fixed, meaning

these names do not

change when certain

encoding is present. For

instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode

label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Sur-

round EX, or no encod-

ing is engaged.

LOCK OPTIONS

TRIGGER SETUP OFF

MUSIC OFF

OFF

2-CHAN OFF

5.1a FILM OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a SurEX OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a STANDARD OFF

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS OFF

2CH BYPASS OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1 OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL OFF

LIVE! MED OFF

LIVE! LARGE OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY ON

DVD1 OFF

DVD2 OFF

SAT OFF

VCR OFF

TV OFF

CD OFF

TUNER OFF

PHONO OFF

ZONE2 INPUTS OFF

ZONE3 INPUTS OFF

FILM OFF

TV OFF

MUSIC OFF

MUSIC SURR OFF

PLIIx + THX OFF

PLIIx MOV OFF

PLIIx MUS OFF

PLII+ THX OFF

PLII MOVIE OFF

PLII MUSIC OFF

PL + THX OFF

PRO LOGIC OFF

+ THX OFF

CIN OFF

MUSIC OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF

CONCERT HHALL OFF

CHURCH OFF

CATHEDRAL OFF

PANORAMA OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO OFF

5.1 FILM OFF

5.1 TV OFF

5.1 MUSIC OFF

SurEX OFF

MUSIC OFF

5.1 PLIIx MOV OFF

5.1 PLIIx MUS OFF

DIGITAL EX OFF

5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR OFF

5.1 MONO OFF

FILM OFF

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Setup Lexicon

3-72

TUNER SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.

REGION USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

Sets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN and

E. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and incre-

ments for these regions.

Note:

The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. It

will always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-8 has

USA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHz

being the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowest

frequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, if

the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it will

actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.

SETUP TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default

Setting Possible Settings

REGION USA USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

SCAN SENS LOW LOW, MED, HIGH

AUTOLOAD N/A N/A

CLEAR ALL N/A N/A

TUNER PRESETS N/A N/A

DISPLAY RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME,

FREQUENCY

RADIO TEXT ON ON, OFF

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

AUTO FREQUENCY ON ON, OFF

SETUP TUNER SETUP REGION

RV-8 Setup

3-73

SCAN SENS LOW, MED, HIGH

Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set the

threshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The default

setting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies will

tune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED

(medium) or HIGH settings.

TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

LOW

MED

HIGH

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP REGION

REGION FM LO LIMIT FM HI LIMIT FM INCREMENT AM LO LIMIT AM HI LIMIT AM INCREMENT

USA 87.90MHZ 107.90MHZ 200 KHZ/.2MHZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 10KHZ

EUROPE 87.50MHZ 108.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 520KHZ 1602KHZ 9KHZ

JAPAN 76.00MHZ 91.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 522KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZ

E. EUR 64.00MHZ 76.00MHZ 50KHZ/.05MHZ 520KHZ 1720KHZ 9KHZ

Setup Lexicon

3-74

TUNER SETUP (continued)

AUTOLOAD

Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected

frequency band.

To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER

SETUP menu and press the right () arrow. The message “PRESS

RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and front-

panel displays.

• To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left () arrow.

• AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses

the next available preset.

• Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNER

button is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOAD

will stop.

• To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select that

band and restart AUTOLOAD.

Note:

Presets are saved when the unit is powered down. Because the

AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using the

CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channels

may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than

once since the last CLEAR ALL.

PRESS RIGHT J

TO START AUTOLOAD

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP AUTOLOAD

RV-8 Setup

3-75

CLEAR ALL

Clears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press the

right () arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT  TO CLEAR

ALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

(Press the left () arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.)

This should be used after all presets have been entered but it is

desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if you

have moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existing

presets and scan for local stations.

TUNER PRESETS

This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER

PRESETS menu. For more information, see “Tuner Presets” on

page 5-2.

SETUP TUNER SETUP CLEAR ALL

PRESS RIGHT J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP TUNER PRESETS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

Setup Lexicon

3-76

TUNER SETUP (continued)

DISPLAY RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCY

Identifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of the

OSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDS

NAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDS

NAME.

PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the

currently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tuner

preset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.

RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which is

intended to be used to identify a station or station program. If the

RDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will be

displayed.

FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel

selected.

Note:

In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of the

Program Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar to

Radio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You may

wish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.

RDS NAME

PRESET NAME

FREQUENCY

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP DISPLAY

RV-8 Setup

3-77

RADIO TEXT ON, OFF

Activates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented as

scrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screen

displays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever

text the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of the

current song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not all

stations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio

Text, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.

When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in the

scrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finished

scrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currently

set listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second set

of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the

beginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.

SCROLL RATE SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting is

MEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower text

scrolling, select SLOW.

SETUP TUNER SETUP RADIO TEXT

OFF

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP SCROLL RATE

SLOW

MEDIUM

FAST

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

Setup Lexicon

3-78

TUNER SETUP (continued)

AUTO FREQUENCY ON, OFF

Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out

or signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stations

broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTO

FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when

signal failure is detected.

If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated,

the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received.

AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when

the following conditions are met:

• The main frequency signal starts to fade.

• The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact

match of the currently selected frequency.

• The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength

than the currently selected frequency.

• The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.

OFF

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

USA

LOW

LOCK OPTIONS

CLEAR ALL

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

AUTO FREQUENCY

RDS NAME

MEDIUM

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP TUNER SETUP AUTO FREQUENCY

RV-8 Setup

3-79

LOCK OPTIONS

Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS

and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.

MODES LOCKED, UNLOCKED

Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all lis-

tening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings

cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be

adjusted.

AUDIO CNTRL LOCKED, UNLOCKED

Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to

LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to

UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

SETUP LOCKED, UNLOCKED

Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these

settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings

can be adjusted.

SETUP LOCK OPTIONS

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

UNLOCKED

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

MODES UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKED

AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP UNLOCKED LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP LOCK OPTIONS MODES

SETUP LOCK OPTIONS AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP LOCK OPTIONS SETUP

Setup Lexicon

3-80

LIVE! CALIBRATION

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode

designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. LIVE! uses a

combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to

enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger, more

reverberant listening space. LIVE! CALIBRATION must be completed

before using any of the LIVE! modes.

Notes:

You should run automatic calibration before running LIVE! CALIBRATION.

See page 3-36 for instructions on running an automatic calibration. Any

changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the

SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE! to become uncalibrated.

If power is lost during calibration of LIVE!, previous settings may be lost

and recalibration of speaker levels and distances, as well as LIVE! is

required.

The Bass, Treble, Tilt EQ and Loudness controls do not function when

LIVE! is running. While LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ

parameters are shown in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu as set to 0. The

LOUDNESS parameter is shown as set to OFF.

LIVE! requires two microphones, available in a kit from your authorized

Lexicon dealer. (If you own the Lexicon four-microphone kit, there is

no need to purchase the two-microphone kit. The microphones should

be permanently mounted in the listening room. Performing LIVE!

CALIBRATION with microphones other than those in the kit can

produce undesirable results.

LIVE! requires that a minimum of four speakers (Front L/R, and either

side L/R or Rear L/R) be set up and connected to the amplifier. If no

subwoofer is present, the crossover setting of the Front L/R speakers

should be set to FULL.

Proper microphone placement, both during calibration and when

running LIVE!, is essential to achieving the desired results. Microphone

placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section.

The location of the sound source (piano, guitar, voices, etc.) is

not critical. LIVE! compensates for sounds that are closer to one

microphone or another.

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

CAUTION!

• The Lexicon microphones require careful handling.

Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones

can cause irreparable damage to the microphone.

• The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not

sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off or in standby mode.

2. Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and

2 connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Connector 1 is for the left

microphone, connector 2 is for the right. Make sure each

microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be referred to

as 1 and 2, based on the input connector to which the microphone

is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting

purposes.

3. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

SETUP LIVE! CALIBRATION

RV-8 Setup

3-81

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE!

Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE!

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Microphone

Position the microphones:

3On or near opposite side walls

3Approximately halfway between the front and

side speakers

3At an approximate height between the waist and

head of a standing person

3In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures

3At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers

Note:

LIVE! can potentially create feedback in the system. The

processing is designed to prevent this, but you should

avoid placing the microphones too close to speakers.

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement during LIVE! calibration

and also for permanent location.

PROPER microphone positioning for LIVE!

Setup Lexicon

3-82

Front

Left

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

Side

Right

Rear

Right

Rear

Left

Side

Left

Microphone

When positioning the microphones,

DO NOT:

7Place the microphones on the front or rear walls

7Place the microphones near the floor or ceiling

7Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other

fixtures

7Place the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

any speaker

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement for LIVE! calibration or

for a permanent location.

IMPROPER microphone positioning for LIVE!

RV-8 Setup

3-83

PERFORMING LIVE! CALIBRATION

To perform LIVE! calibration:

1. Select SETUP LIVE! CALIBRATION as shown above.

2. The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message appears to indicate

that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE!

calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the  button to

cancel LIVE! calibration. Press the  button to begin calibration.

3. The countdown display notifies you that LIVE! calibration begins in

10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10-second delay is to give

you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration

begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements

could affect the calibration results. If you leave the room, you can

return in about 3 minutes (the calibration procedure should be

completed). Press the arrow button to skip the countdown

and begin LIVE! calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates LIVE!

calibration when the countdown ends.

When the LIVE! calibration is finished, the LIVE CALIBRATION

results screen displays one of the following two messages.

• The CALIBRATION DONE message indicates that no errors

occurred during the calibration procedure.

• The SIGNAL TOO LOW message indicates that the micro-

phones failed to pick up sufficient calibration noise signals

for calibration to complete.

4. After reading the message, press to continue.

If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appears:

• Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the

microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 in micro-

phone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are

fully inserted for a solid connection.

• Examine the speakers and the associated amplifier to ensure

that speaker wires are connected and the amplifier is on.

• Run a Microphone Check to determine whether a microphone

has been damaged. See page 3-40 for instructions on check-

ing the microphones.

LIVE! CALIBRATION

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

LIVE! CALIBRATION

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS TEST WILL BEGIN IN

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION DONE

PRESS TO CONTINUE

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SIGNAL TOO LOW

PRESS TO CONTINUE

LIVE! CALIBRATION

IN PROGRESS

PLEASE WAIT

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Audio Controls

Audio Controls............................................................................4-2

Audio Controls Lexicon

4-2

AUDIO CONTROLS

Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the Main Zone audio output connectors and to

control the balance of the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE and FADER parameters

affect the Main Zone audio output connectors, including all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS

listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs. The

ZONE3 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors, including all Zone 3 inputs.

Note:

When LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, and LOUDNESS

controls do not function and the corresponding parameters in the

AUDIO CONTROLS menu default to +0.0dB. The LOUDNESS

parameter defaults to OFF.

BASS –6.0dB to +6.0dB

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and

Subwoofer. The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page

indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings.

TREBLE –6.0dB to +6.0dB

Controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

The TREBLE Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates

the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

+0.0dB

OFF

ZONE2 BALANCE ON

OFF

B< FADER >F -6.0 to +6.0dB

-3.0 to +3.0dB

L< BALANCE >B

SETUP

ZONE3 BALANCE

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

BASS +0.0dB –6.0 to +6.0dB

TREBLE +0.0dB –6.0 to +6.0dB

TILT EQ +0.0dB –3.0 to +3.0dB

LOUDNESS OFF ON, OFF

BALANCE <|> L< to <|> to >R

FADER <|> B< to <|> to >F

ZONE2 BALANCE <|> L< to <|> to >R

ZONE3 BALANCE <|> L< to <|> to >R

AUDIO CONTROLS BASS

AUDIO CONTROLS TREBLE

RV-8 Audio Controls

4-3

The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

BASS Parameter Settings

The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut

applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

TREBLE Parameter Settings

Audio Controls Lexicon

4-4

AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)

TILT EQ –3.0dB to +3.0dB

Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub. This

parameter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a

hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases, frequencies higher

than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are

simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases, frequencies higher

than 1kHz are cut while frequencies lower than 1kHz are

simultaneously boosted. The TILT EQ Parameter Settings graph on

the next page indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ

parameter settings.

LOUDNESS ON, OFF

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically

applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R,

Center and Sub. When ON is selected, loudness compensation is

automatically applied, based on volume level. As volume level

increases, the amount of boost automatically decreases. The loudness

contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference

levels. When OFF is selected, no loudness compensation is applied.

The LOUDNESS Parameter Settings graph on the next page

indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when

the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level

is adjusted.

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

SETUP

ZONE3 BALANCE ZONE3 BALANCE

SETUP

AUDIO CONTROLS TILT EQ AUDIO CONTROLS LOUDNESS

RV-8 Audio Controls

4-5

The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is

automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front

L/R, Center and Sub.

The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main

Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

TILT EQ Parameter Settings LOUDNESS Parameter Settings

Audio Controls Lexicon

4-6

AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)

BALANCE L< <|> >R

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output

connectors.

FADER B< <|> >F

Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output

connectors.

ZONE2 BALANCE L< <|> >R

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output

connectors.

ZONE3 BALANCE L< <|> >R

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 3 audio output

connectors.

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

L< BALANCE >R

L< ZONE2 BALANCE >R

B< FADER >F

SETUP

ZONE2 BALANCE

SETUP

ZONE2 BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS FADER

AUDIO CONTROLS ZONE2 BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS ZONE3 BALANCE

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2

Tuner Presets Lexicon

5-2

TUNER PRESETS

Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available),

frequency and broadcast band is displayed.

In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call

letters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the call

letters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by the

station's Program Service (PS) name. If RDS information is not

available, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is the

listed number location in the Preset menu for that position. For

example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,

then the name for that position is WABC.

To edit a preset, press the menu / arrows until the desired

preset is highlighted, then press the menu  arrow to open the

parameters menu for the selected preset.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

STATION

SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

0.00FM

07 0.00FM

08 0.00FM

10 0.00FM

0.00FM PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

EDIT STATION NAME

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

EDIT PRESET 1

FREQUENCY

BAND

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

Each tuner preset page

allows up to 10 preset

stations.

0.00

FM LOADED

Parameter

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

RV-8 Tuner Presets

5-3

LISTEN TO PRESET

Loads the current preset station. Press the menu  arrow to load

the station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display

“STATION LOADED.”

NAME

Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characters

long. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9,

and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.

CLEAR PRESET

Clears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screen

display will display “PRESS MENU  TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press the

menu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.

TUNER PRESETS LISTEN TO PRESETPAGE 1

TUNER PRESETS NAMEPAGE 1

TUNER PRESETS CLEAR PRESET

PAGE 1

Mode Adjust

Mode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2

Listening Mode Descriptions.......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-2

MODE ADJUST

Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which is

used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menu

opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.

Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode

for the current Main Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening

mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used to

customize the selected listening mode. These adjustments are applied

when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in

the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.

LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION

Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC and

analog input sources. The RV-8 allows listening mode selection for all Main

Zone sources. In some cases, the RV-8 automatically activates a listening mode

in response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understand

the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.

Note:

When headphones are plugged into the RV-8, all listening modes are downmixed

to two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,

HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described in

detail on page 6-34.

Listening mode activation occurs through:

• the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters

(page 3-12).

• the front-panel or remote control Mode button (page 2-17).

• the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

* These listening mode

names differ depend-

ing on the current

input source, speaker

setup and parameter

settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

Descriptions for more

information.

SETUP

MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

MODE ADJUST

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX*

PLIIx MOV*

PLIIx MUS*

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV*

5.1 PLIIx MUS*

DIGITAL EX*

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM*

MUSIC*

2-CHAN*

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a SurEX*

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-3

PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION

The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode

selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and

MIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode

for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.

The RV-8 automatically activates the selected listening mode

whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.

MODE  AND  BUTTONS

The front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can be

used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input

source. Pressing these buttons scrolls up () or down () through

listening modes available for the current Main Zone source.

Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE

ADJUST menu.

For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the  or

 arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listening

modes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left

corner of the Main Zone two-line status.

Dynamic Listening Mode Selection

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain condi-

tions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available

when the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and

source material with specific encoding is played. All dynamic

listening modes are available through the remote control or front

panel Mode button.

See “Dynamic Listening Modes” on page 3-13 for a complete

listing of dynamic listening modes.

LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS

The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used

to activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), THX, Logic 7 Music,

or Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone

input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a

2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is

activated. The table below indicates the listening modes associated

with each mode family selection button.

* These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker config-

uration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speak-

ers (but not both), pressing the button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.

** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen and

front-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input

source that is present.

*** For ES source.

Button 2-Channel

Sources Dolby Digital

Sources DTS(-ES)

Sources 5.1a

Sources

L7 F L7 FILM 5.1 L7 FILM DTS(-ES) L7 FILM 5.1a L7 FILM

L7 M L7 MUSIC 5.1 L7 MUSIC DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC 5.1a L7 MUSIC

L7 TV L7 TV 5.1 L7 TV MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE** N/A

L7 MS L7 MUSIC

SURROUND 5.1 L7 MUSIC DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC N/A

DOLBY DOLBY PLIIx MOV DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV* MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE** N/A

DTS DTS NEO:6 CIN MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE** DTS(-ES) N/A

THX DOLBY PLIIx + THX THX UL2CIN DTS THX

DTS THX UL2 CIN

DTS(-ES) THX***

5.1a THX Sur

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-4

LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS

Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus are

shown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-39.

L7 FILM

This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel

stereo or matrix-encoded film sources.

Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives

seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives

full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase

the perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of the

listening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement

compared to other decoders.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

L7 TV

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or

matrix-encoded television broadcast sources.

Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast

sources.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

AUTO AZIMUTH ON ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST FILM

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

AUTO AZIMUTH ON ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING FILM OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST TV

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-5

L7 MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or

matrix-encoded music sources.

Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music

sources.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

L7 MUSIC SURR

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo

music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of

recordings that contain added reverb. It is recommended for

classical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces with

added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.

Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is

similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon

products. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source

and sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard

from all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that

simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST MUSIC

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MSURR OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST MUSIC SURR

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-6

DOLBY PLIIx + THX & DOLBY PLII + THX

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified

speakers. Dolby PLII(x) + THX encoding:

• Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs

that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie

theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in

home theaters without re-equalization.

• Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in

smoother sound movements between them.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when the

front and side speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode is a dynamic listening mode

and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded sources. To activate this listening mode, play

the 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded source, then select DOLBY

PLIIx + THX using the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded source was present.

Note:

The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if

either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MODE ADJUST PLIIX + MODE ADJUST PLII +

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-7

DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes:

• Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.

• Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic

decoding.

• Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode

and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx

Mov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded film source was present.

Note:

The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes

if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MODE ADJUST PLIIx MOVIE MODE ADJUST PLII MOVIE

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-8

DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSIC

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present.

Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel Dolby

Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS

listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBY

PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote control

Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded film source was present.

Note:

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MODE ADJUST PLIIx MUS MODE ADJUST PLII MUSIC

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

PANORAMA OFF ON, OFF

CTR WIDTH 3 MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

DIMENSION NEUTRAL FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

SURROUND DLY 10ms 0 to 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-9

DOLBY PL + THX

This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded

sources and decodes four channels: three front channels and one

mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified

speakers. Dolby PL + THX mode:

• Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs

that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie

theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home

theaters without re-equalization.

• Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in

smoother sound movements between them.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby

Surround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby

Surround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel

with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the

L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST PL +

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST PRO LOGIC

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-10

DTS NEO:6 + THX

This mode is designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo

film sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when both side and rear

speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five

channels when only side or rear speakers are present.

In addition to THX processing, THX re-equalization is applied to

simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most

films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when

played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

This listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be

assigned as a preferred listening mode. To select this listening mode

use the remote control or front-panel Mode button. When the

2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automatically

activate a DTS Neo:6 + THX listening mode if this mode was

activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

These modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital

stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when

both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in

parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are

present.

These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be

assigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of these

listening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Mode

button. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode was

activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

Note:

• The RV-8 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listening

mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.

The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or

96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.

• The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the

front-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CIN

listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS

button when a 2-channel input source is present.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST +

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST CIN MUSIC

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-11

NIGHTCLUB

The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music

sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections,

especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The

NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to

the front, side and rear channels to simulate small, intimate

listening spaces.

The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

CONCERT HALL

The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends

them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listening

spaces.

The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH 11 0 to 18

SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFF

SIZE 5m 4 to 20m

LIVENESS 196ms 30ms to 20.2s

PRE-DELAY 5ms OFF, 1 to 100ms

ROLLOFF 9.0kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

EFFECT LVL +3dB –12 to +6dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST NIGHTCLUB

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18

SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFF

SIZE 20m 4 to 20m

LIVENESS 1.72s 30ms to 20.2s

PRE-DELAY OFF OFF, 1 to 100ms

ROLLOFF 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

EFFECT LVL –2dB –12 to +6dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST CONCERT HALL

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-12

CHURCH

The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,

smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium

listening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long rever-

beration time relative to their sizes.

The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode

because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full

parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

CATHEDRAL

The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It

uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant

decay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals –

with long reverberation time relative to their size.

The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full

parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH 5 0 to 18

SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFF

SIZE* 20m 4 to 30m

MID RT* 1.56s 24ms to 24.3s

BASS RT* 1.87s 5ms to 48.6s

PRE-DELAY 24ms OFF, 1 to 100ms

ROLLOFF 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

EFFECT LVL –3dB –12 to +6dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST CHURCH

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH 12 0 to 18

SPEECH DETECT ON ON, OFF

SIZE* 30m 4 to 30m

MID RT* 3.72s 24ms to 24.3s

BASS RT* 4.47s 5ms to 48.6s

PRE-DELAY 23ms OFF, 1 to 100ms

ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

EFFECT LVL –8dB –12 to +6dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST CATHEDRAL

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-13

PANORAMA

The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and

matrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon

algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front

speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.

Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position

and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to

either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider

area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle

from the display device.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

Select PANORAMA CALIBRATION to open

the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown

to the left, to calibrate the PANORAMA

listening mode. This listening mode must be

calibrated to take full advantage of its

effects.

For best results, you should center the

primary listening position between the front

left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top

of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be

calibrated with varying results.

An external calibration source is required to calibrate the

PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo

source.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL +4dB –12 to +6dB

BASS CONTENT STEREO BINAURL, MONO, STEREO

LOW FREQ WIDTH +0 –25 to +25dB

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

INPUT BALANCE <|> L< to <|> to >R

CALIBRATION Refer to next column

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST PANORAMA

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg 10 to 90deg

LISTENER POS +0 -127 to +127

MODE ADJUST PANORAMA CALIBRATION

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE

SPEAKER ANGLE

LISTENER POS

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED

LEFT & RIGHT

30deg

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-14

To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:

1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary

listening position.

2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary

listening position are properly measured. To do this, select one

of the following options.

• Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to

have the RV-8 automatically calibrate speaker distances.

• Measure the distance between the primary listening posi-

tion and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the cor-

responding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the

closest available value.

3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening

position is not centered between the front left and right

speakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMA

CALIBRATION  LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for

the difference using the remote control  and  arrow

buttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter

range represents about one-third of an inch. The Left illus-

tration shows the left-of-center position. The Right illustration

shows the right- of-center position

4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.

5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.

6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,

set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in

the right ear.

7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter

settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the

PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound

should be perceived to come from all around the primary

listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the

calibration procedure.

LEFT RIGHTCENTER

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-15

2-CH SURROUND

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left

channel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel

to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right

for the center. It is recommended for background music.

2-CHANNEL

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and

right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recom-

mended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and for

comparison purposes with other listening modes.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MONO LOGIC

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary

Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to

use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width

and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 2-CH SURROUND

MODE ADJUST 2-CHANNEL

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL –9dB –12 to +6dB

ACADEMY FILTER ON ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST MONO LOGIC

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-16

MONO SURROUND

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends the

mono source to all channels.

MONO

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono

sources to the center channel and subwoofer.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1 L7 FILM

The 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode

designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film

sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other

decoders.

It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with

enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are

present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived

length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST

MONO SURROUND

MODE ADJUST MONO Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1 FILM

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-17

5.1 L7 TV

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1 L7 MUSIC

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1

L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING FILM OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1 TV

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1ms to 30ms

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0dB to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1 MUSIC

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-18

THX, THX UL2Cin & THX SurEX

These modes are designed for 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding. They

apply THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur

in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might

sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equal-

ization. THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them. These modes are recommended for

home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the

speaker setup.

The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the

behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when

activated:

• The THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both the side

and rear speakers are present and THX ULTRA2 decoding is

engaged. THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND

EX parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround

EX encoding is detected.

• The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side and

rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is

engaged. THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the

SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding

is detected.

• The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX

Surround EX decoding are deactivated.

Note:

Some EX-encoded sources are not flagged, and require manually

setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding.

When THX Ultra2 decoding is active:

• Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono

surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

MODE ADJUST OR

OR SurEX UL2Cin

Input Source

Parameter Setting 5.1-Channel Dolby Digital 5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Dolby Digital (Flagged) 5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)

SURROUND EX: AUTO THX ULTRA2 THX SurEX THX ULTRA2

SURROUND EX: ON THX SurEX THX SurEX THX SurEX

SURROUND EX: OFF THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2 THX ULTRA2

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-19

• ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more

information.

When THX Surround EX decoding is active:

Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The THX UL2Cin listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot

be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.

Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote control Mode

buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate a THX UL2Cin listening mode if this mode was activated

the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

THX MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital music sources, and cannot be activated unless side and rear

speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the

rear speakers. See “ASA” on page 3-35 for more information. For

best results, place the rear speakers close together in your home

theater.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The THX MUSIC listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources. Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote

control Mode arrow buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate a THX MUSIC listening mode if this mode was activated

the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SURROUND EX AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MUSICMODE ADJUST

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-20

5.1 PLIIx MOV

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back

7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film

sources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of

up to 120Hz.

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, side

and rear speakers are present.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in

non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film

sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if

this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital

source was present.

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the

configuration.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MOV

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-21

5.1 PLIIx MUS

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1

discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music

sources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of

up to 120Hz.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in

non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if

this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital

source was present.

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

MODE ADJUST 5.1 PLIIx MUS

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX

These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1

discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five

main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to

as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.

The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the

input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker

setup.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX

encoding. This listening mode can also be used with other types

of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table

at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior

of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the

side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX

decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a

surround back channel from the other surround channels.

• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX

DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding is detected.

• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the

EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or

without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not

include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding.

MODE ADJUST OR DIGITAL EXDIGITAL

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EX DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Input Source

Parameter Setting 5.1-Channel Dolby Digital 5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Flagged) 5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Non-Flagged)

EX DECODING: AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL

EX DECODING: ON DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL EX

EX DECODING: OFF DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-23

5.1 2-CHANNEL

This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for

converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into

2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.

The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to

the Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1 MONO LOGIC

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realisti-

cally expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically

increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the

listening space.

Note that:

When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-8 automatically

activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER MIX +0dB –25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB –5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 –127 to +127

MASTER LEVEL +0dB –5 to +5dB

COMPRESSION OFF AUTO, ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –20.0 to +0.0dB

SUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, -30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL –9dB –12 to +6dB

ACADEMY FILTER ON ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1 MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-24

5.1 MONO SURR

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1 MONO

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

mono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel and

subwoofer.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1 MONO SURR

MODE ADJUST

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1 MONO

MODE ADJUST

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-25

DTS-ES DECODING

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designed

for, at a minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES

sources.

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differ

depending on the encoding present in the input source, the

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is

activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions

for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.

• DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear

speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to

ON or AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

• DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING

parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter

is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

• DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encoded

DTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the

MODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menu

when a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers are

selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

Note:

The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2

and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will be

explained in greater detail later in this manual.

Input Source

Parameter Setting 5.1-Channel DTS 5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES 6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

ES DECODING: AUTO DTS DTS-ES DTS-ES

ES DECODING: ON DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS-ES

ES DECODING: OFF DTS DTS DTS

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-26

DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILM

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to

decode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources with

enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are

present, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the

perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-

encoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs,

depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSIC

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes, similar to the DTS-ES

L7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven

channels from 5.1 and 6.1-channel music sources with

enhanced front steering to provide remarkable sound

improvement compared to other decoders.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of

5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES music sources. The

listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding

present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter

setting and the speaker setups.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

FILM

MODE ADJUST FILM

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST OR MUSIC

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-27

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2Cin

The DTS THX UL2Cin (ULTRA2 CINEMA) and DTS-ES THX listening

modes allow 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel DTS sources that

lack DTS-ES encoding. They are designed for playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel DTS-ES

discrete-encoded film sources. DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX

are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

These modes apply:

• THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that

occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie

theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in

home theaters without re-equalization.

• THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between

the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting and the

speaker setup.

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and

rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated.

To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding:

1. Press MODE ADJUST   DECODING.

2. Use the  or  arrow to select either AUTO (the default) or OFF.

When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF, the DTS-ES THX

UL2 Cin listening mode is always active. When the parameter is set

to AUTO, the DTS-ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode activates when

a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated:

• Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono

surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

• ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more

information.

The DTS-ES THX listening mode

The DTS-ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and

rear speakers are present and DTS-ES decoding is active.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is

set to AUTO (the default) or ON and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded

or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

The table on the next page shows the conditions for the behavior of

the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX modes when activated:

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

UL2Cin

MODE ADJUST OR

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-28

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2CIN (continued)

DTS THX MUSIC

The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are

present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear

speakers. Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for

more information. This mode is recommended for home theaters

with THX-certified speaker setups.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode and can only be

activated with the front-panel or remote control Mode  and 

buttons.

DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) Discr

This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES

sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES

sources.

The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range

of 120Hz.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding

present in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and

the speaker setup. Refer to page 6-25 for more information.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Input Source

Parameter Setting 5.1-Channel DTS 5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES 6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

ES DECODING: AUTO DTS THX UL2Cin DTS-ES THX DTS-ES THX

ES DECODING: ON DTS-ES THX DTS-ES THX DTS-ES THX

ES DECODING: OFF DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin DTS THX UL2Cin

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

LFE MIX +0.0dB –10.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST OR Discr

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-29

DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHAN

These modes, recommended for recording purposes, send

downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the

front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output

signals.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1a L7 FILM

The 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon lis-

tening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels

from 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.

This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass

management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and

audio controls (tone controls).

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER MIX +0dB –25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB –5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 –127 to +127

MASTER LEVEL +0dB –5 to +5dB

LFE MIX +0.0dB –20.0 to +0.0dB

ES DECODING AUTO AUTO, ON, OFF

SUB LEVEL +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

2-CHAN

MODE ADJUST OR

2-CHAN

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1 FILM

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-30

5.1a L7 MUSIC

The 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1a

LOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music

sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX & 5.1a THX

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX, and 5.1a THX listening

modes are designed to convert 5.1-channel analog film sources that

lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio. The

modes also allow 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass manage-

ment, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio

controls (tone controls). The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX,

and 5.1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters

with THX-certified speakers. These modes apply:

• THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that

occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie the-

aters, and might sound too bright when played back in home

theaters without re-equalization.

• THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between

the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them.

The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the

speaker setup.

The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in

which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated.

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF ON, OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE OFF ON, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7kHz 500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms OFF, 1 to 30ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1a MUSIC MODE ADJUST OR OR

5.1a SurEX 5.1a

5.1a UL2Cin

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-31

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side

and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active.

THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX param-

eter is set to OFF. When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated:

• Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono sur-

round channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

• ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more

information.

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and

rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active.

THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX

parameter is set to ON.

When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is

applied to derive three surround channels from 5.1-channel analog

sources.

The 5.1a THX listening mode

The 5.1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2

nor THX Surround EX decoding is active.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Input Source

Parameter Setting 5.1-Channel Analog 5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Analog (Flagged) 5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Analog (Non-Flagged)

SURROUND EX: ON 5.1a THX SurEX 5.1a THX SurEX 5.1a THX SurEX

SURROUND EX: OFF 5.1a THX ULTRA2 5.1a THX ULTRA2 5.1a THX ULTRA2

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER ON ON, OFF

SURROUND EX OFF ON, OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-32

5.1a THX MUSIC

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources. It cannot be activated unless

side and rear speakers are present. This mode performs best in

home theaters where the rear speaker are placed close together.

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer

to the ASA parameter description on page 3-35 for more informa-

tion.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front-

panel or remote control Mode buttons.

5.1a STANDARD

This mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass

management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and

audio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used,

the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS

listening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals

(with appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio output

connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Option/Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

LFE MIX +0.0dB -10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1a MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1a STANDARD

MODE ADJUST

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-33

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

This mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into

2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to

the front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for

recording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or

multi-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel record-

ing format.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

5.1a BYPASS

• Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as

DVD-A or SACD players.

• Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to

the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, as

shown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internal

processing.

• When both side and rear speakers are present, surround

channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.

To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT

LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to

deactivate the associated surround speakers.

• Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then

2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS

parameter between ON and OFF.

Note:

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controls

are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER MIX +0dB -25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB -5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0 -127 to +127

MASTER LEVEL +0dB -5 to +5dB

LFE MIX +0.0dB -20.0 to +0.0dB

SUB L/R LVL +0dB OFF, -30 to +12dB

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

OUTPUT LEVELS Refer to page 6-37

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

MODE ADJUST 5.1a BYPASS

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-34

2CH BYPASS

This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to

the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no

internal processing.

The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated

whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV

menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS

listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and

the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.

Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then

2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS

parameter between ON and OFF.

Note:

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) are

not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.

HEADPHONE L7

HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.

This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related

Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of

envelopment when listening through headphones.

The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channel

sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the

HEADPHONE listening mode are available.

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded music or film

sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7

processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically

increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening

through headphones.

The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Digital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No

parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.

MODE ADJUST 2CH BYPASS MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE 5.1

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-35

HEADPHONE DTS

HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sources

through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing

and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the

perceived sense of envelopment when listening through

headphones.

The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTS-

encoded sources when listening through headphones. No param-

eters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.

HEADPHONE 5.1a

HEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sources

through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing

and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the

perceived sense of envelopment when listening through

headphones.

The HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode is recommended for

5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.

No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode are

available.

LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED & LIVE! LARGE

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode

designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. It provides

a realistic illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space. LIVE!

SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small, but larger

than an average living room. LIVE! MED simulates the reverberations of

a small hall. LIVE! LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall.

LIVE! requires two permanently mounted microphones. (See “LIVE!

CALIBRATION” on page 3-80 for placement and calibration instruc-

tions.) LIVE! cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CDs or

DVDs

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE

MODE ADJUST HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

MID RT 597ms 115ms to 15.4s

BASS RT 597ms 23ms to 30.8ms

ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

TREB CUT RT 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

PRE-DELAY 10ms 10ms to 100ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

REVERB LVL +0dB –80dB to +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL –13dB –80dB to +12dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

SHAPE 0 0 to 4

SPREAD 0% 0% to 100%

SIZE 19m 4m to 60m

LIVE! SMALL

MODE ADJUST LIVE! MED LIVE! LARGE

OR OR

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-36

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

LIVE! MED parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

MID RT 1.84s 115ms to 15.4s

BASS RT 2.76s 23ms to 30.8ms

ROLLOFF 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

TREB CUT RT 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

PRE-DELAY 18ms 10ms to 100ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! MED ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

REVERB LVL –4dB –80dB to +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL –14dB –80dB to +12dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

SHAPE 2 0 to 4

SPREAD 25% 0% to 100%

SIZE 30m 4m to 60m

LIVE! LARGE parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

MID RT 4.71s 115ms to 30.8s

BASS RT 4.71s 23ms to 30.8ms

ROLLOFF 3.1kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

TREB CUT RT 2.4kHz 500Hz to 20kHz

PRE-DELAY 20ms 10ms to 100ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

REVERB LVL –6dB –80dB to +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL –17dB –80dB to +12dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz 30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

SHAPE 2 0 to 4

SPREAD 28% 0% to 100%

SIZE 38m 4m to 60m

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is

used to adjust output levels for the Main

Zone audio output connectors labeled

Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode

menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate

multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter

appears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes a

SUB LVL parameter.

See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom

and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to

restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default

versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the

listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listening

mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.

When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom

condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.

The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will

sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to

their factory-default settings.

Note:

The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode

menu parameter settings.

To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions of

the selected listening mode:

1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS-

TOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.

2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is

open, press the remote control  and  arrow buttons to

toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM

versions of the selected listening mode.

3. When finished, press the  arrow button to close the CUSTOM

VS PRESET drop-down menu.

Parameter Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

SIDE L/R +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

REAR L/R +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

SUB +0dB OFF, –30 to +12dB

Listening Mode

MODE ADJUST OUTPUT LEVELS

OUTPUT LEVELS

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

+0dB

SUB +0dB

(Listening Mode)

MODE ADJUST CUSTOM

(Listening Mode)

MODE ADJUST CUSTOM CUSTOM VS PRESET

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

PRESET

CUSTOM

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-38

RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,

restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default

settings.

To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:

1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE

option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message

appears in the on-screen display.

2. Press the  arrow button to restore the factory-default version of

the selected listening mode. Press the  arrow button to close the

message without restoring the factory-default.

Note:

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the

factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corre-

sponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is

automatically set to OFF.

(Listening Mode)

MODE ADJUST CUSTOM RESET MODE

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

PRESS RIGHT V

TO RESTORE MODE

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-39

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON, OFF

Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.

When set to ON, the RV-8 provides an increased sense of

spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This

enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are

positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when the

primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effec-

tiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best

results, it is recommended that you position the surround speakers

to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.

ACADEMY FILTER ON, OFF

When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono

film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than

more recent mono film sources.

AUTO AZIMUTH ON, OFF

Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-8

continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically

adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to

ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with

maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected

listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that you

set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF

for music sources.

BASS CONTENT BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO

Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.

When set to BINAURL, the RV-8 activates low-frequency compen-

sation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with

dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources

recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources

recorded with stereo bass.

BASS ENHANCE ON, OFF

Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction

that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The

effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, depending

on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to

reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front,

side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of

40Hz or lower.

BASS RT 5ms to 48.6s

Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount

of time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dB

in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT

parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high

value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

BASS XOVER 30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.

CALIBRATION

Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which

is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to

“PANORAMA” on page 6-13 for more information.

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-40

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

CENTER OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.

Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!

modes.

CENTER DEPTH 0 to 18

Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,

changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher

settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance

of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

CENTER MIX –25 to +5dB

Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this

parameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

CNTR DLY SAMPLES –127 to +127

Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set this

parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed

and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

COMPRESSION AUTO, ON, OFF

Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligi-

bility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When

ON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF,

compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for

Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,

especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in

all Dolby Digital modes.

CTR WIDTH MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard

from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is

heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right

speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in

various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and

factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore

the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in

all modes.

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versions

of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.

Available in all modes.

DIMENSION FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be useful

with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among

all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced toward

the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound

field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to

REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening

space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-41

EARLY RFLX LVL –80dB to +12dB, OFF

Controls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in all

LIVE! modes.

EFFECT LVL –12 to +6dB

Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available

in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.

ES DECODING AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from

5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON is

selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When

OFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is

detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTS

source is detected.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is

engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding

is not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins

on page 5-25 for more information.

Note the following:

• DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear

speakers are present.

• The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the

ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS

source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to

AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel

discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.

This parameter is available in all DTS modes.

EX DECODING AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear

channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or

without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital

sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disen-

gaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is

engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded

with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non- flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding

in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input

source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input

signal.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby

Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL

listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX

decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby

DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 for

more information.

Note the following:

• Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless

both side and rear speakers are present.

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-42

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

• This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,

DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.

• When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the

remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or

Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the

EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON and

OFF settings.

FRONT STEERING OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center

speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to

the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is

applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.

When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended

that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources

and to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,

L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.

INPUT BALANCE L< to <|> to >R

Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input

connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible

channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.

LFE MIX –20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1-

or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeled

Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be

combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output

signal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels.

Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper

tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the

speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed

into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu

parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in

all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1

MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.

LISTENER POS –127 to +127

Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered

between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the

–127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.

Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for more

information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.

Note:

The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the

front left and right speakers.

LIVENESS 30ms to 20.2s

Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter

adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic

more reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available in

NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.

LOW FREQ WIDTH –25 to +25dB

Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This

correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.

Available in PANORAMA mode.

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-43

MASTER LEVEL –5 to +5dB

Adjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

MID RT 24ms to 24.3s

Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time

required for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB in

level. The full parameter range might not be available depending

on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high

value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

OUTPUT LEVELS

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output

levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,

Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for more

information. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

PANORAMA ON, OFF

When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening

modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel

signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.

Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

Note:

The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx

MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate

PANORAMA listening mode (page 6-13).

PRE-DELAY 1 to 100ms, OFF

Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of rever-

beration. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.

Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, you

should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then

make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

RE-EQUALIZER ON, OFF

Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.

When set to ON, the RV-8 applies a high-frequency filter. When set

to OFF, the RV-8 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recom-

mended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many

films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright

when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1

L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,

DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.

REAR DLY OFFSET OFF, 1 to 30ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the

arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that you

increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are

located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in

the listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA

mode.

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-44

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

REAR L/R –30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,

restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory-

default settings. Available in all modes.

REVERB LVL –80 to +0dB, OFF

Controls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.

ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It is

recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate high-

frequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

SHAPE 0 TO 4

Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the

sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either is

set to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

SIDE L/R –30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the Main

Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,

5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.

SIZE 4 to 20 or 30m

Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or

30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of

the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,

CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!

Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high

value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.

SOUND STAGE FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output

connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels

are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound

field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/R

and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the

perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening

space. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not

attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.

Available in all Logic 7 modes.

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-45

SOURCE RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode

external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the

sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening

position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come

from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT

is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the

primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that

begins on page 6-13 for more information about the SOURCE

parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

Note:

The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,

although both the front left and right speakers generate the external

calibration source signal.

SPEAKER ANGLE 10 to 90deg

Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the

primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle

between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening

position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6-13

for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.

Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

SPEECH DETECT ON, OFF

Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to

ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo

in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front

left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience

synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,

the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the

stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the

amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

SPREAD 0 to 100%

Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly

create the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; if

either is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

SUB & SUB LVL OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listening

mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears on

listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accom-

modate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!

modes.

SURR ROLLOFF 500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio output

connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to

output signals generated by the RV-8. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

SURROUND DLY 0 to 15ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the

arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recom-

mended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of

depth is desired in the listening space.

SURROUND EX AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to

extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When

ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX

Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital

sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-46

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged

when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Sur-

round EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is not

engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source

with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

(continued)

not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source

with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source

does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX

Surround EX encoding.

THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX ULTRA2 listening

modes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not

engaged. Refer to the 5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX SurEX and 5.1 THX

listening mode descriptions that begin on page 6-18, or the DTS

THX ULTRA2 and DTS-ES THX listening mode descriptions that

begin on page 6-27 for more information.

Note the following:

• Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low

level clicks in the front speakers.

• THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both

side and rear speakers are present.

SURROUND MIX -5 to +5dB

Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that

you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available

in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

TREB CUT RT 500Hz to 20kHz

Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in

the reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to grow

progressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because it

simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting this

parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates,

and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available in

all LIVE! modes.

VOCAL ENHANCE +6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

Controls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connector

labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,

particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-47

MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS

The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.

The parameter... Is used in these modes

5 SPKR ENHANCE All L7 modes

ACADEMY FILTER MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

AUTO AZIMUTH L7 FILM and L7 TV

BASS CONTENT PANORAMA

BASS ENHANCE All L7 modes

BASS RT CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

CALIBRATION PANORAMA

CENTER All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and

LIVE! modes)

CENTER DEPTH NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

CENTER MIX 5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

CNTR DLY SAMPLES 5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

COMPRESSION All Dolby Digital modes

CTR WIDTH Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

CUSTOM All modes

CUSTOM VS PRESET All modes

DIMENSION Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

EARLY RFLX LVL All LIVE! modes

EFFECT LVL NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

ES DECODING All DTS modes

Mode Adjust Lexicon

6-48

EX DECODING 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL

FRONT STEERING L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes

INPUT BALANCE PANORAMA

LFE MIX All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes

and 5.1a BYPASS

LISTENER POS PANORAMA CALIBRATION

LIVENESS NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL

LOW FREQ WIDTH PANORAMA

MASTER LEVEL 5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

MID RT CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

OUTPUT LEVELS All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

PANORAMA Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

PRE-DELAY NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

RE-EQUALIZER L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS

(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THX

REAR DLY OFFSET All L7 modes and PANORAMA

REAR L/R All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

RESET MODE All modes

REVERB LVL All LIVE! modes

ROLLOFF NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

SHAPE All LIVE! modes

SIDE L/R All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

The parameter... Is used in these modes

MODE-PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS (continued)

RV-8 Mode Adjust

6-49

SIZE NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

SOUND STAGE All L7 modes

SOURCE PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SPEAKER ANGLE PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SPEECH DETECT NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL

SPREAD All LIVE! modes

SUB & SUB LVL All except LIVE! modes

SURR ROLLOFF All L7 modes

SURROUND DLY Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

SURROUND EX THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX

SURROUND MIX 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

TREB CUT RT All LIVE! modes

VOCAL ENHANCE All L7 modes

The parameter... Is used in these modes

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance..................................................................7-4

Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4

Troubleshooting and Maintenance Lexicon

7-2

TROUBLESHOOTING

The RV-8 does not power on.

1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”)

position.

2. Attempt to power on the RV-8 with the front-panel Standby

button and remote control On button.

3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between

the rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.

4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.

The remote control does not work.

1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the

front-panel IR receiver. When the RV-8 is not using the rear-

panel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line of

sight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. The

remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight

or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.

2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted

with the proper polarity (page 1-6).

3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are

low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage

condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no audio.

1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be

increased with the front-panel volume knob or the remote

control VOL  and  buttons.

2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE

ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen and

front-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate

mute, press the Mute button or adjust the volume level.

3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN

parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned

to the selected input.

4. Make sure the RV-8 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,

follow the instructions that begin on page 2-29 to open the

STATUS menu for the current input source.

Dialogue sounds muffled.

If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a

custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,

make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to

NONE (page 3-31).

A humming sound is present in the audio.

1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from

the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground

loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the

cable provider for assistance.

2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.

Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated

component is properly grounded and connected to the same

electrical circuit as the RV-8.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no video.

1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables –

to ensure a good connection to the associated component.

RV-8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

7-3

2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN

(page 3-11) parameters to ensure the appropriate video

connector is assigned to the selected input.

RF interference is present in the audio or video.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM

antennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.

2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.

The RV-8 is exhibiting erratic behavior.

1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait

10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |

(“on”) position.

2. Use the RV-8 configuration tool to download the current RV-8

configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all user-

defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on

page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page to

restore factory-default settings.

If all else fails...

1. Document all user-defined settings on the Installation

Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instruc-

tions on page 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.

2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.

3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or

www.lexicon.com.

Note:

Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase for

answers to frequently asked questions and additional trouble-

shooting information.

The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute it

resumed. This seems to happen occasionally.

Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY option

active? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. When

the broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTO

FREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies

and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If the

station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal,

then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the

volume mute. Otherwise, auto frequency scans for another

alternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot of

alternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeable

amount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Auto

frequency option.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance Lexicon

7-4

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should

be performed on a periodic basis.

• Clean the RV-8 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do

not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strong

commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool

or metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, a

low-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its

exterior surface.

• Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote

control requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries are

low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage

condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8. Normal

operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS

When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and user-

defined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Before

restoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings in

the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.

To restore factory-default settings:

1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet

that begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings are

restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to

their factory-default settings.

2. If the RV-8 is powered on, press the front-panel standby button

or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and

deactivate the RV-8. If the RV-8 is in standby mode, proceed to

step 3.

3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control On

button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-8.

4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mute

button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the on-

screen and front-panel displays.

5. Press the remote control  and  arrow buttons to highlight

the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to

restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to

close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory-

default settings.

6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remote

control  arrow button to select this option.

• If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the

FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page

will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. When

this message appears, press a front-panel or remote control

button to restart the RV-8.

• If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu

will close and the two-line status will open in the on-screen

and front-panel displays.

FACTORY SETTINGS

EXIT

RESTORE DEFAULTS

FACTORY SETTINGS

HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

Appendix

Specifications ............................................................................ A-2

Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... A-4

Appendix A Lexicon

A-2

SPECIFICATIONS

Audio Input & Output Connectors

Analog Audio Inputs Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2

stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors

Digital Audio Inputs • Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical

connectors

• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-

958, S/PDIF standards

• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates

• Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS, DTS-

ES discrete and DTS-96K data formats

Main Zone Audio

Outputs Eight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,

Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R

Zone 2 Audio Outputs • One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo con-

nector

• One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector

• One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical con-

nector

Zone 3 Audio Outputs One stereo (RCA, variable output level) connector

Headphone One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connector

Amplifier Seven channels, two channels can be assigned to Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Main Zone Audio Performance

A/D Conversion 24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture

D/A Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

*Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz,

–0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz

*THD + Noise Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven

*Dynamic Range • 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

*Signal-to-Noise Ratio • 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

Input Sensitivity 200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB

input gain

Input Impedance 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Preamp Output Level • 150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)

• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume

at +12dB

Preamp Output

Impedance 500Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)

Zone 2 and Zone 3 Audio Performance

A/D Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture (Zone 2 only)

D/A Conversion 24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

Frequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz,

reference 1kHz

THD + Noise Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)

Dynamic Range 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Input Sensitivity 200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level)

Input Impedance 100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Preamp Output Level • 200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum

• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume

at 0dB

Preamp Output

Impedance 300Ω in parallel with 150pF

Video Input & Output Connectors

Video Inputs Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component

video (RCA)

Video Outputs Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two

S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component

(RCA)

Main Zone Audio Performance

RV-8 Appendix A

A-3

Composite & S-Video Performance

Compatibility NTSC, PAL and SECAM

Switching Active

Output Level 1.0V peak-to-peak

Impedance 75Ω

Input Return Loss >40dB

Differential Gain <0.5%

Differential Phase <0.5°

Bandwidth >25MHz

K Factor <0.3%

Gain ±0.15dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >65dB

Frequency Response 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dB

Component Video Performance

Compatibility 3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent

Switching Passive

Impedance 75Ω

Insertion Loss <3dB

Bandwidth >150MHz

Video Converter NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/Pr

Microphone Input Connectors

Inputs Two microphone jacks

Input Sensitivity 10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)

Input Impedance 20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)

FM Tuner Performance

Tuning Range 64MHz to 108MHz

Usable Sensitivity <4uV, 1.6mV typical

Selectivity >87dBmV, 93dBmV typical

Frequency Response 50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dB

THD + Noise <0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV

Image Rejection >50dB, >60dB typical

AM Suppression >45dB, >55dB typical

AM Tuner Performance

Tuning Range 520 to 1720kHz

Usable Sensitivity <8uV, 4uV typical

THD + Noise < 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)

Wideband AGC >80dBmV

Phono Performance (MM)

Frequency Response 50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10Hz

THD + Noise < 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV input

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimum

Compatible Amplifier Connectors

Banana Plugs Standard 0.75 inch plugs

Spade Connectors Size 10-12 gauge

Bare Wire Up to 10 gauge bare wire

Other

Trigger Outputs One power on/off and one programmable connector on

detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)

RS-232 Serial Input/

Output Two 9-pin D-sub connectors

FM Tuner Performance

Appendix A Lexicon

A-4

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Power Requirements 120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detach-

able power cord

RV-8

Dimensions &

Weight

• Height (with feet): 7.76 inches (197.1mm)

• Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)

• Depth: 21.2 inches (538.48mm)

• Weight: 65 lb. (29.48kg)

Rack-Mounting • Optional brackets are available for installation in a stan-

dard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)

Environment • Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)

• Storage temperature: –30° to 75°C (–22° to 167°F)

• Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensation

Remote Control • Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit, prepro-

grammed and learning

• Requires four AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recom-

mended)

Other DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Application of Council Directive(s):

89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC

Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:

EN 55013:2001

EN 55020:2002

EN 61000-3-2-2000

EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001

EN 61000-3-11:2000

EN 60065:1998

Manufacturer: Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

The equipment identified here conforms to the Direc-

tive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.

Type of Equipment: Digital Controller

Model: Lexicon RV-8

Date: August 2005

Harman Specialty Group

Vice President of Engineering

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Tel: 781-280-0300

Fax: 781-280-0490

Appendix

Menu Tree..................................................................................B-2

Appendix B Lexicon

B-2

MENU TREE

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN POWER ON -30dB

MUTE LEVEL -30dB

Z2 PWR ON -30dB

Z3 PWR ON -30dB

HEADPHONE -30dB

MAX VOLUME +12dB

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED

SETUP UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

continued on page B-6

continued on page B-8

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

continued on page B-14

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

OFF

TRIGGER SETUP OFF

MUSIC OFF

OFF

2-CHAN OFF

5.1a FILM OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a SurEX OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a STANDARD OFF

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS OFF

2CH BYPASS OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1 OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL OFF

LIVE! MED OFF

LIVE! LARGE OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

REMOTE ONLY ON

DVD1 OFF

DVD2 OFF

SAT OFF

VCR OFF

TV OFF

CD OFF

TUNER OFF

PHONO OFF

ZONE2 INPUTS OFF

ZONE3 INPUTS OFF

FILM OFF

TV OFF

MUSIC OFF

MUSIC SURR OFF

PLIIx + OFF

PLIIx MOV OFF

PLIIx MUS OFF

PLII+ OFF

PLII MOVIE OFF

PLII MUSIC OFF

PL + OFF

PRO LOGIC OFF

+ OFF

CIN OFF

MUSIC OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF

CONCERT HALL OFF

CHURCH OFF

CATHEDRAL OFF

PANORAMA OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO OFF

5.1 FILM OFF

5.1 TV OFF

5.1 MUSIC OFF

SurEX OFF

MUSIC OFF

5.1 PLIIx MOV OFF

5.1 PLIIx MUS OFF

DIGITAL EX OFF

5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR OFF

5.1 MONO OFF

FILM OFF

MUSIC OFF

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY OFF

CUSTOM NAME OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

TUNER SETUP

REGION USA

SCAN SENS LOW

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY RDS NAME

RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

LIVE! CALIBRATION

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS ssTO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

continued on page B-13

continued on page B-14

POWER MANAGEMENT

BROWNOUT PROTECT ON

CAUTION!

IF SET TO OFF

THIS ACTION WILL

DISABLE INTERNAL

BROWNOUT PROTECTION

RV-8 Appendix B

B-3

SETUP MENU: INPUTS

Selecting SETUP INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input (for example,

DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below.

The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of

which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default

parameter settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below

indicate default parameter settings for each input.

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME DVD1

DIGITAL IN COAX-1

ANALOG IN NONE

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN 1

2-CH FILM

D 5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

DVD2 INPUT SETUP

NAME DVD2

DIGITAL IN COAX-2

ANALOG IN NONE

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-2

COMPONENT IN 2

2-CH FILM

D5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

SAT INPUT SETUP

NAME SAT

DIGITAL IN OPTICAL-1

ANALOG IN ANALOG-1

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-3

COMPONENT IN 3

2-CH TV

D 5.1 TV

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

VCR INPUT SETUP

NAME VCR

DIGITAL IN NONE

ANALOG IN ANALOG-2

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-4

COMPONENT IN 3

2-CH FILM

D 5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

CD INPUT SETUP

NAME CD

DIGITAL IN COAX-3

ANALOG IN NONE

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN NON

COMPONENT IN NONE

2-CH MUSIC

D 5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1a 5.1a MUSIC

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

PHONO

INPUT SETUP

NAME PHONO

DIGITAL IN NONE

ANALOG IN PHONO

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN NONE

COMPONENT IN NONE

2-CH MUSIC

D 5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1a 5.1a MUSIC

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

TUNER INPUT SETUP

NAME TUNER

DIGITAL IN NONE

ANALOG IN TUNER

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN NONE

COMPONENT IN NONE

2-CH MUSIC

D 5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1a 5.1a MUSIC

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

TV INPUT SETUP

NAME TV

DIGITAL IN OPTICAL-2

ANALOG IN ANALOG-3

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-5

COMPONENT IN 3

2-CH TV

D 5.1 TV

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Appendix B Lexicon

B-4

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the cor-

responding menu shown below. These menus are

identical regardless of which input is selected.

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

DVD1 INPUT NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

PRESS MENU TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

DVD1 ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

OFF

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

AUTO GAIN

+0.0dB

+0.dB

MANUAL -18 to +12dB

DVD1 VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

DVD1 COMPONENT

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

DVD1 D MODE

FILM

MUSIC

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

HEADPHONE 5.1

DVD1 MAIN ADV

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

DIGITAL

OFF

AUTO

-6

-15

-30

-45

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

DIGITAL

ANLG

DMIX

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

OFF

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

DVD1 2-CH MODE

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PLII +

PRO LOGIC

PL +

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

HEADPHONE

DVD1 MIC MODE

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

LIVE! CALIBRATION

NONE

TUNER

PHONO

ANALOG-8

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

LIVE!

The appearance of the ANALOG

IN menu depends on the configu-

ration of the analog audio input

connectors. Refer to page 3-8 for

more information.

NONE

Indicates the current amount of

analog audio input level adjust-

ment for the selected analog

audio input connector. This

parameter cannot be adjusted.

USE LAST

DVD1 5.1a MODE

MUSIC

HEADPHONE 5.1a

5.1a

USE LAST

FILM

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

LEGACY VIDEO A

DVD1 ZONE2 ADV

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

+0dB

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

44.1kHz

48kHz

-18 to +12dB

88.2kHz

96kHz

BLOCKED

ENABLED

OFF

SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME DVD1

DIGITAL IN COAX-1

ANALOG IN NONE

ANLG IN LVL AUTO

VIDEO IN S-VIDEO-1

COMPONENT IN 1

2-CH FILM

D 5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a 5.1a FILM

MIC LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD1 MODE

FILM

MUSIC

2-CHAN

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

POWER MANAGEMENT

NORMAL

FAST

FORMAT DETECT NORMAL

SETUP MENU: INPUTS (continued)

RV-8 Appendix B

B-5

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP 40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

CROSSOVER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

80Hz

80Hz 80Hz 80Hz 80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

80 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

80 Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

ULTRA2 SUB

THX 80Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

SUBWOOFER

BGC

ASA

THX 80Hz

REAR L/R SPEAKERS

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

SIDE L/R SPEAKERS

CENTER SPEAKERS

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

OFF

APART

TOGETHER

THX REAR SPEAKERS

THX 80Hz

NONE

OFF

APART

TOGETHER

LOCK OPTIONS

FULL + SUB FULL + SUB

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

FULL + SUB FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

FULL + SUB

SUBWOOFER

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Appendix B Lexicon

B-6

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

CHECK MICROPHONES

GROUP MICROPHONES

INTO A BUNDLE IN THE

MIDDLE OF THE ROOM

PRESS TO

BEGIN MIC CHECK

CHECK MICROPHONES

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

PLEASE WAIT

CHECK MICROPHONES

CHECKING MICROPHONES

PLEASE WAIT

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CHECK MICROPHONES

MIC 1

MIC 2

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

PLACE MICROPHONES

ERROR

When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK

MICROPHONES screen, pressing the  arrow but-

ton opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no

ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO-

PHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opens

the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.

When an ERROR mes-

sage appears on the last

CHECK MICROPHONES

screen, press the  or 

arrow button to highlight

the desired microphone.

Then, press the arrow

button to view more

details about the error.

One of the messages

shown to the left will

appear in the on-screen

display.

PRESS TO CONTINUE

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Appendix B

B-7

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

ERROR

+0.0dB

AUTO DISTANCES

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

CUSTOM SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES

LEVELS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

CUSTOM SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES

LEVELS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

OK ERROR

ERROR

LEVELS

DISTANCES

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

ERROR

0.0ft

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens

shown on the right indicate the individual calibra-

tion results for each speaker. Press the  and 

arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker cali-

bration parameter. Then, press the  arrow but-

ton to view more detailed results for the selected

speaker.

Press the  arrow button to return to the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).

Then, press the  arrow button to select the other

calibration procedure or press the  arrow button

to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker dis-

tances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in

the on-screen display, indicating the results for

each calibration procedure. If there is an error,

press the  or  arrow button to highlight the

desired calibration procedure. Then, press the 

arrow button to select this procedure. Selecting

DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES screen

shown below. Selecting the LEVELS option opens

the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Appendix B Lexicon

B-8

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

ERROR

+0.0dB

AUTO DISTANCES

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

CUSTOM SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

N/A

APART

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

0.0ft

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUB (MONO)

ERROR

0.0ft

APPLIED

AUTO LEVELS

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

(SPEAKER)

The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates

the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press

the  and  arrow buttons to highlight the desired

speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the 

arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected speaker.

The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the

individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the

 and  arrow buttons to highlight the desired

speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the 

arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected speaker.

(SPEAKER)

SET DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

0.0ft

0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft 0.0ft

SET LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB 0.0dB

APPLIED

ORIGINAL LEVELS

APPLIED

AUTO DISTANCES

APPLIED

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)

RV-8 Appendix B

B-9

75 to 120dB

OFF

SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

+0.0dB

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

R SR RR

L SL RL

SUB

40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

60Hz

40Hz 40Hz 60Hz 60Hz

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITER

-18 to 12dB

BASS PEAK LIMITER

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

100dB

INTERNAL NOISE

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

CUSTOM SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

0.0ft

FEET

METERS 0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

SPEAKER SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

FEET

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Appendix B Lexicon

B-10

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

REAR PANEL CONFIG

8 STEREO INPUTS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

8 STEREO INPUTS

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

SETUP MENU: I/O CONFIG

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

BRIGHTNESS ALWAYS ON

100%

ALWAYS OFF

100%

75%

50%

25%

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

2 SECONDS

TOP

NTSC

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

OFF, 1 to 60ms

OFF

SETUP MENU: DISPLAYS

AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

POWER MANAGEMENT

RV-8 Appendix B

B-11

TUNER SETUP

REGION USA

SCAN SENS LOW

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY RDS NAME

RADIO TEXT ON

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

PRESS TO CONTINUE

CALIBRATION DONE

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

PRESS TO CONTINUE

SIGNAL TOO LOW

LIVE! CALIBRATION

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

IN PROGRESS

PLEASE WAIT

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP MENU: LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

HIGH

MED

LOW

PRESS RIGHT J

TO START AUTOLOAD

PRESS RIGHT J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

OFF

FAST

MEDIUM

SLOW

PRESET NAME

RDS NAME

FREQUENCY

SETUP MENU: TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Appendix B Lexicon

B-12

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

01 0.00FM

02 0.00FM

03 0.00FM

04 0.00FM

05 0.00FM

06 0.00FM

07 0.00FM

08 0.00FM

09 0.00FM

10 0.00FM

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

EDIT PRESET 1

FREQUENCY 0.00

BAND FM

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

EDIT STATION NAME

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

STATION

Each tuner preset page allows up

to 10 preset stations.

MAIN MENU: TUNER PRESETS

MAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLS

LOADED

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

+0.0dB

OFF

ZONE2 BALANCE ON

OFF

B< FADER >F -6.0 to +6.0dB

-3.0 to +3.0dB

L< BALANCE >B

SETUP

ZONE3 BALANCE

RV-8 Appendix B

B-13

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

* These listening mode

names differ depend-

ing on the current

input source, speaker

setup and parameter

settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

Descriptions for more

information.

SETUP

OFF

MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS OFF

2CH BYPASS OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1 OFF

HEADPHONE OFF

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL OFF

LIVE! MED OFF

LIVE! LARGE OFF

MODE ADJUST

FILM OFF

TV OFF

MUSIC OFF

MUSIC SURR OFF

PLIIx + * OFF

PLIIx MOV* OFF

PLIIx MUS* OFF

PLII+ OFF

PLII MOVIE OFF

PLII MUSIC OFF

PL + OFF

PRO LOGIC OFF

+ OFF

CIN OFF

MUSIC OFF

NIGHTCLUB OFF

CONCERT HHALL OFF

CHURCH OFF

CATHEDRAL OFF

PANORAMA OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL OFF

MONO LOGIC OFF

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO OFF

5.1 FILM OFF

5.1 TV OFF

5.1 MUSIC OFF

*OFF

MUSIC OFF

5.1 PLIIx MOV* OFF

5.1 PLIIx MUS* OFF

DIGITAL EX* OFF

5.1 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR OFF

5.1 MONO OFF

FILM* OFF

MUSIC* OFF

*OFF

MUSIC* OFF

*OFF

2-CHAN* OFF

5.1a FILM OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a * OFF

5.1a MUSIC OFF

5.1a STANDARD OFF

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

FILM

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

+0.0dB

REARSOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

+0.0dB

FILM

OFFRE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

REAR

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

CUSTOM

MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

SOUND STAGE

+0.0dB

MUSIC

NEUTRAL

ON5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

MUSIC SURR

VOCAL ENHANCE

SOUND STAGE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5 SPKR ENHANCE

+0.0dB

NEUTRAL

FRONT STEERING MSURR

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PLIIx MOV

PANORAMA

DIMENSION

OFF

CTR WIDTH

PLIIx MUS

SURROUND DLY

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

NEUTRAL

10ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PRO LOGIC

RE-EQUALIZER

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

PLIIx +

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CENTER DEPTH

SIZE

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LIVENESS

196ms

SPEECH DETECT ON

5ms

9.0kHz

+3dB

CONCERT HALL

CENTER DEPTH

SIZE

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LIVENESS

20m

1.72ms

SPEECH DETECT ON

OFF

2.4kHz

-2dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CIN

CHURCH

CENTER DEPTH

SIZE

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MID RT

20m

1.56s

SPEECH DETECT ON

1.87s

24ms

2.4kHz

-3dB

BASS RT

CATHEDRAL

CENTER DEPTH

SIZE

BASS RT

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

MID RT

30m

3.72s

SPEECH DETECT ON

4.47s

23ms

3.1kHz

CUSTOM

-8dB

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL

LOW FREQ WIDTH

REAR DLY OFFSET

INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

SURR ROLLOFF

+4dB

3.1kHz

BASS CONTENT STEREO

15ms

<l>

PLII +

RE-EQUALIZER ON

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PLII MOVIE

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PLII MUSIC

PANORAMA OFF

CTR WIDTH 3

DIMENSION NEUTRAL

SURROUND DLY 10ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PL +

RE-EQUALIZER ON

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER ON

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

2-CH SURROUND

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

2-CHANNEL

+0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MONO SURROUND

EFFECT LVL

ACADMY FILTER

MONO LOGIC

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

-9dB

3.1kHz

SUB LVL

CUSTOM

MONO

+0dB

Appendix B Lexicon

B-14

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST (continued)

2-CHAN

CENTER MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

LFE MIX

MASTER LEVEL

+0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

SUB L/R LVL

CUSTOM

+0dB

+0.0dB

+0dB

AUTO

DECODING

5.1a FILM

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1a MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC

RE-EQUALIZER OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER

LFE MIX

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

+0.0dB

SURROUND EX OFF

5.1a

LFE MIX

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

5.1a MUSIC

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

5.1a STANDARD

MUSIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LFE MIX +0.0dB

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

LFE MIX

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

AUTO

LIVE! SMALL

MID RT 597ms

BASS RT 597ms

ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

TREB CUT RT 3.1kHz

PRE DELAY 10ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

MUSIC

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 PLIIx MOV

EX DECODING AUTO

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 PLIIx MUS

EX DECODING AUTO

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED

REVERB LVL +0dB

EARLY RFLX LVL -13dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz

SHAPE 0

SPREAD 0%

SIZE 19m

LIVE! MED ADVANCED

REVERB LVL -4dB

EARLY RFLX LVL -14dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz

SHAPE 2

SPREAD 25%

SIZE 30m

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED

REVERB LVL -6dB

EARLY RFLX LVL -17dB

BASS XOVER 156Hz

SHAPE 2

SPREAD 28%

SIZE 38m

LIVE! MED

MID RT 1.84s

BASS RT 2.76s

ROLLOFF 2.4kHz

TREB CUT RT 3.1kHz

PRE DELAY 18ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

LIVE! LARGE

MID RT 4.71s

BASS RT 4.71s

ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

TREB CUT RT 2.4kHz

PRE DELAY 20ms

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

5.1 FILM

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 TV

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING FILM

RE-EQUALIZER OFF

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC

RE-EQUALIZER OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER

COMPRESSION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LFE MIX

OFF

+0.0dB

SURROUND EX AUTO

FILM

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER ON

SOUND STAGE REAR

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB

DECODING AUTO

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC

RE-EQUALIZER OFF

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE OFF

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

LFE MIX +0.0dB

DECODING AUTO

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

RE-EQUALIZER ON

LFE MIX

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

AUTO

DIGITAL EX

EX DECODING AUTO

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX +0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL +0dB

COMPRESSION OFF

LFE MIX +0.0dB

SUB LEVEL +0dB

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL -9dB

ACADEMY FI8LTER +ON

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO SURR

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO

SUB LEVEL +0dB

CUSTOM

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX +0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL +0dB

LFE MIX +0.0dB

SUB LEVEL +0dB

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

5.1a BYPASS

NO PARAMETERS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONES

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES 5.1

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES

NO PARAMETERS

HEADPHONES 5.1a

NO PARAMETERS

RV-8 Appendix B

B-15

Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for

the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is

selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.

Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical

regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE

SPEAKER ANGLE

LISTENER POS

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED

LEFT & RIGHT

30deg

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL +4dB

STEREO

3.1kHz

15ms

BASS CONTENT

LOW FREQ WIDTH

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

INPUT BALANCE

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL -9dB

3.1kHz

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

CENTER +0dB

+0dB

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUB

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL -9dB

3.1kHz

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS CUSTOM

-25 to +5dB

0 to 18

CENTER MIX

CENTER DEPTH

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CENTER 5 SPKR ENHANCE

ACADEMY FILTER

AUTO AZIMUTH

OFF

5ms to 48.6s

BASS RT

BASS CONTENT

BASS ENHANCE

OFF

BINAURL

MONO

STEREO

-127 to +127

CTR WIDTH

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

COMPRESSION

AUTO

OFF

MIN,1 to 6, MAX

DIMENSION

CUSTOM VS PRESET

PRESET

CUSTOM

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

-12 to +6dB

EFFECT LVL FRONT STEERING

EX DECODING

AUTO

OFF

DECODING

AUTO

OFF

MSURR

MUSIC

FILM

Appendix B Lexicon

B-16

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST (continued)

10 to 100ms

PRE-DELAY

OFF, 1 to 30ms

10 to 90deg

-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB OFF, -30 to 12dB

4 to 20 or 30ms

30ms to 20.2s

-25 to +25

-5 to +5dB

24ms to 48.6s

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

REAR L/R

SIZE

CENTER MIX

SPEAKER ANGLE VOCAL ENHANCE

LFE MIX

INPUT BALANCE

+6.0dB

+3.0dB

+0.0dB

SOURCE

RIGHT

LEFT & RIGHT

LEFT

SOUND STAGE

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

PANORAMA

OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

OFF

MID RT

MASTER LEVEL

LOW FREQ WIDTH

LIVENESS

L< <l> >R

+5 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SIDE L/R

-127 +0 +127

RESET MODE

PRESS RIGHT

TO RESTORE MODE

SURROUND EX

AUTO

OFF

0 to 15ms

SURROUND DLY

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SUB LEVEL

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SUB L/R LVL

SPEECH DETECT

OFF

RV-8 Appendix B

B-17

MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS

2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

-6

-15

-30

-45

D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

-6

-15

-30

-45

EX ENCODED

PG1

CSL

SR LFE

STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

-6

-15

-30

-45

ENCODING

PG1

CSL

SR LFE

STATUS

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

PG2 5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

2CH BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

DIGITAL STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

D STATUS PG2

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

FACTORY SETTINGS

EXIT

RESTORE DEFAULTS

FACTORY SETTINGS

HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.

5.1a STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-29 for more information.

SAMPLE RATE ANLG

96kHz

STATUS MENUS

Appendix

Remote Control Programming ..................................................C-2

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes .........................................C-18

Appendix C Lexicon

C-2

REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING

The RV-8 remote control has been designed to provide a new standard

in remote control technology offering a very powerful and flexible

preprogrammed and learning product.

The RV-8 remote control can operate up to 10 home entertainment

and home automation components by using the preprogrammed

code library in the remote control, by teaching up to 530 commands

into the RV-8 remote from your original remote controls, or a

combination of both. The RV-8 remote has many additional operating

features to add convenience and enjoyment to the operation of any

home entertainment system. You can create your own button labels on

the LCD screen; program 50 favorite channel buttons; operate the

volume, channel and transport buttons from one device when you are

in another device; and perform multiple tasks with the press of a single

button.

The RV-8 remote control features extensive preprogrammed IR codes

for practically all major audio and video equipment. It can set up and

operate various components by simply entering a threedigit code

number assigned to the brand of component. The code numbers for

the various brands of components are listed beginning on page C-18.

Refer to the programming instructions on page C-5 for additional

information.

DEVICE ACTIVATION

In addition to controlling the RV-8, the remote is designed to operate

up to seven components including Satellite Boxes, TV, DVD (LD), VCR,

CD and Phono. Remote control buttons perform different commands

depending on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 or another

device is activated.

However, each of the device buttons and corresponding functions cab

be changed to meet individual requirements.

The Phono function could be used to operate lighting controls; the

second DVD (DVD2) could be changed to operate a second TV, etc.

Each device button on the main screen contains two subpages of

commands and the name of any LCD button can be changed, using

up to five alphabet characters, numbers and symbols to customize the

unit to fit your audio/video devices. Refer to ““Edit Text on Function/

Device Buttons” on page 13 for more information.

RV-8 Appendix C

C-3

MACRO OPERATIONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent out with the push

of a single button. Any function available on an original remote control

or in the preprogrammed database can be added to a macro to

completely automate what would normally be done by pushing

buttons one at a time. A macro can be configured to power on a TV or

projector, RV-8, and RT-10 Disc Player, change to the appropriate

inputs and outputs, dim lights and start a movie. It can be as simple or

as comprehensive as desired. There are two types of buttons that can

be used for macro operations: M1, M2, M3; POWER and SYSTEM OFF

Buttons, as well as the programmable device buttons.

The M1, M2 and M3 are called ”system-wide” buttons because they

send out the same signal no matter what device is currently controlled.

The POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons can be made “system-wide” if

they are programmed with macros.

Note:

Programming the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons with a macro overrides

the preprogrammed or learned code on the button.

See page C-10 for further information. Each of these five buttons is

designed to be able to send out a series of up to 20 commands that are

programmed into the buttons. One common use is to turn on and

turn off all A/V components with one button press. Device buttons can

be programmed with any macro sequence desired.

The remote has 10 device buttons which can send out a series of up to

20 programmed commands when pressed for more than one second.

These buttons are commonly used in sending audio input codes when

you press the button to go to a device. The audio receiver would make

an automatic input switch according to the device button pressed.

However, these buttons can be programmed with any desired macro.

Up to 50 favorite channel buttons can be programmed into the RV-8

remote. Each of these buttons can send out up to 10 commands. Refer

to “Programming Favorite Channels” on page 9 for more information.

Note:

The last Device selected will remain active when on the HOME page and will

be shown at the bottom of the LCD screen. For example, if you are using

“TV” and then return to the HOME page, the hard buttons remain in TV

mode. The LCD buttons only change when another device is selected.

The remote can be set up to operate audio component volume control

buttons (UP, DOWN and MUTE) while all the other buttons control

other equipment. The remote can also be set up to operate channel

control and transport functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, FAST

FORWARD, SKIP-, SKIP+, PAUSE and RECORD buttons) from VCR,

DVD, LD, CD or any other mode while all other buttons in the remote

control are controlling other components. See page C-12 for more

information.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-4

REMOTE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW

The first task is to get all original remote controls together. You may

have one or more components that do not have original remote

controls. These can still be controlled by the RV-8. The

preprogrammed method must be used for those devices. For the rest,

you can program the RV-8 to make it compatible with all components

by following the preprogrammed method instructions, by using the

original remote controls to teach the RV-8, or through both methods.

Next, it is recommended that you decide whether a “device-based,” or

an “activity-based” configuration is desired.

A “device-based” configuration centers on each device with its two

LCD pages controlling one component. All of the functions that the

original remote control has programmed in it would be put onto one

device. The RV-8 remote comes with the labels and preprogrammed

codes in a “device-based” setup.

When a preprogrammed code is chosen for a component from the

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes tables which start on page C-18,

that code will be applied to one device only.

An “activity-based” configuration centers on what you are doing at the

time. If you are watching a DVD on your TV, and are using the RV-8 to

control the sound, you may want to start by setting up the DVD device

using the preprogrammed method described in the next column, and

then add functions from the other devices you will be using while

watching your DVD video to the DVD device.

For example, while playing a DVD, to adjust the volume of the RV-8,

use the “Punch Through” method described on page C-12 to put the

RV-8’s volume control into the DVD device. To adjust other functions of

the RV-8 while staying in the DVD device, use the learning method

described on page C-7 to add those functions to the DVD device, such

as surround sound controls, the receiver's

DVD input code, the TV's power code, etc. In that instance, everything

that is needed for watching a DVD on your TV without having to

switch back and forth from device to device is available.

All programming is done by first entering the SETUP mode in the

remote control. Press both the HOME and ENT (enter) buttons,

simultaneously for three seconds to access the SETUP mode shown

below. “SETUP” will be displayed at the top of the LCD screen. Specific

programming instructions begin on the next page.

SETUP

P-PRO LEARN

FAV MACRO

PUNCH RECAL

ERASE EDIT

LIGHT CLONE

RV-8 Appendix C

C-5

USING PREPROGRAMMED CODES

To program the remote to make it compatible with other

components:

1. Manually power on the device to be operated.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds until SETUP appears at

the top of the LCD screen.

3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON” at the bottom of

the LCD screen. Press the button for the device you wish to

program. For example, to program a TV, press the TV button.

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE” at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Select the device from which to access the code table.

Note:

When using the Preprogramming method, always use the appropriate

button as shown in the column when asked ”FROM TABLE.” The

labels of the buttons may have been changed, but the codes are in

the positons as shown to the left. For example, the AUDIO Code table

will always be the top left button. The CD Code table will always be

the fourth button down on the right side of the LCD screen, etc.

Use DVD2, not DVD1, to access the DVD code library. DVD1 has

been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10 Disc Player.

6. The remote will be flashing “ENTER NUMBER.” Refer to the tables

starting on page C-18 and find the manufacturer/brand of your

device. (If programming the remote for the TV device, find the

TV’s device code table, and so on.)

7. Point the remote control toward the device and enter the first

three-digit code number selected for your device. There is no way

of knowing which code is the one that will have the functions that

more closely match your device than the others, so it is wise to try

them all. See step 9 on the next page. (Enter the code number

within 20 seconds of beginning the programming; otherwise the

remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of

time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more

than one code number assigned to your brand, try one code

number at a time until the right code number is found (the

number that turns off the device). If the device turns off when the

three-digit code is entered, make note of the code. It will have at

least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the

device.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button. The

device should turn on. After it is confirmed that the right code is

entered, save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. At this point try ALL of the buttons on the remote, and see which

ones work with the device. The majority of the buttons should

Appendix C Lexicon

C-6

work with the device. Make note of the code if it seems to be the

right one, and try the next one. You are trying to find the one that

has the most functions to operate your equipment. If there are any

functions missing, you will learn them from your original remote in

the “Using Learning Method” section on page C-7.

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from Step 1

above.

11. Press EXIT at any time to stop the procedure.

12. When you are finished programming the remote, exit from the

preprogramming mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Note:

A programmed code for each device can be changed at any time by

using the preprogrammed method which starts on the previous page.

A new code will override an old code. For example, this would be done

if a TV is replaced with a new TV. The code table for Laserdisc is stored

under DVD2. The code table for cable box is stored under Zone 2. The

code table for cassette player is stored under Zone 3.

AUTO SCAN WITH THREE-DIGIT NUMBER

You can also program the remote control by sending out a series of

Power Off commands for different brands stored in the library by using

the following steps. This is similar to the first method, except it is easier

to move through all of the device codes for your device and make note

of each one that turns your device OFF.

To program the remote to make it compatible with other

components:

1. Manually turn on the device you plan to operate.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON.” Press the device you

wish to program. (For example, to program TV, press the TV button.)

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE.” Select the device from

which the scanned code will be selected. (Important: If you have

already relabeled your device keys, the LCD screen will not look

like the illustration on page C-5. Select the appropriate LCD

button for the “FROM TABLE” using the labels as shown in the

illustration on page C-4. For example, if you have relabeled

PHONO as LIGHTS, you would still push the bottom right button

to access the AUX Code Table.)

6. Point the remote control toward the component and press either

the UP or DOWN button on the LCD. (It will send out a series of

Power Off codes when the button is kept pressed and the code

numbers that are being sent are shown on the LCD.) If the right

code number is sent, the component will turn off right after the

code number is transmitted.

7. Release the UP or DOWN button as soon as the device is turned

off. If you passed the one that turned off the device, manually turn

the device back on, and reverse your UP or DOWN one press at a

time, until the unit turns off. There is no way of knowing which

RV-8 Appendix C

C-7

code is the one that will have the functions that more closely

match the device than the others, so it is advised to try them all.

See Step 9 below. (Press the UP or DOWN button within 20

seconds of beginning programming; otherwise the remote will

revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will

go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more than one code

number assigned to your brand, try one code number at a time

until the correct code number is found (the number that turns off

the device). If the device turns off when you enter the three-digit

code, make note of the code. It will have at least some of the

functions in it that are needed to control the device.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button.

After ensuring that the right code is entered, save the code by

pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. Confirm that the right code number that matches the component

was entered by pressing other functional buttons. If any of the

buttons do not operate as they should, repeat from step 1.

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from step 1

(previous page).

11. Press EXIT at any time if you do not wish to proceed.

12. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button

and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

USING LEARNING METHOD

The RV-8 remote can be programmed to operate a device by

“teaching” the correct commands to the device buttons on the main

screen menu; to the two sub-pages within each device button; to the

31 buttons and the joystick located in the middle of the remote control.

The RV-8 remote learns these commands by receiving infrared signals

directly from your existing remote controls. The RV-8 remote receives

these signals through its learning eye, located at the top of the unit.

Apart from the PAGE, HOME and FAV buttons, which cannot be taught,

the RV-8 remote has the capability of learning up to 530 commands.

Note:

Function buttons are buttons that can be assigned a command to control

a particular action for a device. Commonly used function buttons include

the 2 pages of sub-commands within each of the 10 devices: channel up/

down, volume up/down, menu, guide, exit, info, digits 0-9 and the center

of the joystick (thumbpad).

CAUTION! Do not edit the Main, Zone 2 or Zone 3 but-

tons. Doing so will remove RV-8 control.

IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER

If the remote control fails to learn a function after a first attempt:

• Keep the remotes stable by placing them on a flat surface.

• Make sure the original remote is pointed at the learning eye at

the top end of the case and is not at an angle.

• Make sure both remotes’ batteries aren't low.

• Avoid programming the RV-8 remote under bright lights,

which can interfere with the infrared signals.

• Some buttons require a single, short push of the original

remote's button; other “repeating” buttons, such as the VOL

button, require that you “press and hold” the original remote’s

button until “Good” flashes twice on the LCD screen.

• Try varying the distance between the remotes to find an optimal

distance at which the codes are learned on the first or second try.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-8

PROGRAMMING THE FUNCTION BUTTONS

To program the Function Buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Select the DEVICE that contains the function button you wish to

program.

4. Press the PAGE button to go to page 2 of the device if necessary.

5. Place the original remote control head to head with the RV-8

remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

6. Press the button on the RV-8 remote you wish to program. Only

the three HOME, PAGE and FAV buttons cannot be programmed.

It is not recommended that you re-program the Main, Zone 2 or

Zone 3 buttons.

7. Press the button on the original remote control that you wish to

program onto the RV-8 remote. Once the RV-8 remote has

received the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash “GOOD” on the

LCD screen, indicating it learned the code correctly. (Perform Step

6 within 20 seconds of step 5; otherwise the remote will revert to

the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to

the MAIN device page.) If it flashes “Fail,” repeat from step 4 until

it learns successfully.

8. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the buttons

that are required.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit the

LEARNING mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP

mode by pressing the HOME button again.

If you are having problems learning to the Volume, Channel and

Transport buttons, it may be because you have previously assigned a

“Punch Through” from another device to that device. To remove a

Punch Through, just “punch through” the device to itself. For

example, to erase a punch through from a TV to a SAT device, just

“punch” through the TV to the TV.

See “Programming “Punch Through” Functions” on page 12 for more

information.

PROGRAMMING THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS

This procedure will program ONE learned code onto the Device

button, so that when that Device is selected, it will send out the

learned signal as it changes to that Device's function pages.

To program the one learned code onto the Device button:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

4. Place the original remote control head-to-head with the RV-8

remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

5. Select any of the 10 device buttons to program onto the RV-8

remote. Press the button on the original remote control to

program into the Device button chosen on the RV-8 remote. Once

the RV-8 remote hasreceived the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash

“GOOD” on the LCD screen, indicating it learned the code

correctly. If it flashes ”FAIL,” repeat from step 4 until it learns

successfully. (Make sure to enter the code signal within 20 seconds

of programming.)

6. Return to step 5 until all Device buttons have been programmed.

7. When done programming, press the HOME button to exit the

Learning mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME

button once again.

RV-8 Appendix C

C-9

Note:

Follow these instructions only if you actually want a code sent when

changing devices. It may not be desired to send out codes when changing

to a device. For example, you program the RV-8’s TV input code on the TV

device, and are currently in the DVD device pages. The RV-8’s input is set to

DVD. Now you want to quickly adjust the picture on the TV. If the TV

device button is pushed, it will change the input on the RV-8 to TV and you

will not be able to adjust the picture for the DVD. In this case, it would be

better to not program a code to the TV device.

PROGRAMMING FAVORITE CHANNELS

Up to 50Favorite Channel buttons can be programmed and saved.

Each favorite channel button can send up to 10 commands with one

button press.

To program Favorite Channel Buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the FAV button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the device button that corresponds to the component that

the FAV channel will control. For example, pressing the TV device

will only send the type of code to which that the TV responds to.

Pressing the SAT device will only control the satellite box.

4. Press the LCD button you will be assigning to the favorite channel

and enter the channel number you wish to store in the FAV

channel button. Up to 10 digits can be stored.

5. Press the favorite channel button selected in step 4 again to store

the programmed channel.

Note:

If a wrong channel number is pushed, move the cursor by using the

left or right button of the joystick and then reassign the correct

channel number.

6. Repeat from Step 3 until all the desired FAV channel buttons have

been programmed.

7. Once programming is completed, press the HOME button to exit

from the Favorite Channel mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again.

There are five pages of LCD screens for favorite channel programming.

Scroll to other pages by pressing the PAGE or FAV button. In the

Favorite Channels macro, the following buttons can be used: 0-9,

ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and INFO/PAUSE.

Note:

To make even more powerful FAV macros, codes can be learned from

original remote(s) to the 0-9, ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and

INFO/PAUSE buttons in any device, and used in your FAV macros. (This will

not work if a preprogrammed device code has been applied to those

buttons.) For example, some TVs require a code be sent after the digits

other than the ENTER code in order to change channels. In this case, you

could learn the proper code to the ENTER button from your original TV

remote, and use that in your FAV macro.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-10

PROGRAMMING MACRO BUTTONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent with the push of a

single button. There are two types of macro functions that can be

programmed: functions involving the M1, M2 and M3 buttons;or

functions involving the POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons. Each of

these buttons is designed to send up to 20 commands. The 10 device

buttons can also send a macro of up to 20 commands when the device

button is pressed for more than one second while on the HOME page

of the remote control.

Note:

If the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons are programmed with a macro, they

will no longer function as ON and OFF buttons for components. To restore

their original on and off function, erase any macros programmed onto them.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO M1, M2, M3,

POWER AND SYSTEM OFF BUTTONS

To program macro functions to the M1, M2, M3, Power, System

Off buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT button

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the macro button (M1, M2, M3, Power or System Off)

being programmed.

4. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device

macro button you selected, in the order you want them

stored. Up to 20 commands can be stored.

5. Be sure to end a macro on the Device page that you would like it

to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

6. Store the commands programmed into the macro button by

pressing the CH UP button.

7. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the Macros

that you require.

8. When programming is complete, press the HOME button. Exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will not

work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro.

The M1,

M2, M3, POWER and SYSTEM OFF macros are system-wide, which means

they will function the same no matter what device is being used when they

are programmed.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO THE TEN

DEVICE BUTTONS

To program Macro function to the 10 device buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENTER buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

4. Press one of the 10 device buttons.

5. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro

button you selected in the order you want them stored. Up to 20

commands can be stored.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will

not work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro.

6. Be sure to end your macro on the Device page that you would like

to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

RV-8 Appendix C

C-11

7. Return to step 4 until all desired commands are programmed.

8. Save the commands selected to the macro button by pressing the

CH UP button.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit from this

mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SET UP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again. Tip: Remember that a

single push of a Device Button that has a macro connected to it

will take you to that device's function pages. Hold the Device

Button down for one second in order to send the macro that you

have created for that Device Button.

Note:

Pressing the PAUSE button (bottom right of cursor pad) during the macro

programming will add a time delay of 0.2 seconds between the

commands. For example, pressing the PAUSE button three times will create

a pause of 0.6 seconds between the commands where the delay was

inserted. Pressing PAUSE does not count as a macro step.

When using a macro, remember to keep the remote pointed toward

the components until the macro is finished being transmited. A

“Sending” icon will flash in the upper right corner of the LCD screen as

the macro is sending each command. It will not appear when a series

of PAUSE commands are being executed. Wait until the icon finishes

flashing before using other functions or putting down the remote.

SAMPLE MACRO SEQUENCE

The following is a sample macro which demonstrates what a macro

can accomplish. This example assumes the names of the devices have

not been changed and that the “punch through” technique was used

to assign the VOL to the RV-8. If the labels have been changed, insert

the changed names into the example.

In this example, the M1 button will be used to power on the TV, the

RV-8 and the cable box; choose the appropriate inputs; and tune in a

favorite TV channel.

1. Press HOME and ENT simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press MACRO.

3. Press M1.

4. Press MAIN. (Opens the remote control MAIN device page.)

5. Press POWER.

6. Press TV. (Opens the TV device page.)

7. Press POWER.

8. Press HOME.

9. Press SAT. (Opens the SAT device page.)

10. Press POWER.

11. Press HOME.

12. Press MAIN

13. Press PAUSE three times. Pressing the PAUSE button three

timesallows for an extra .6 seconds of wait time (3 x .2 seconds per

push = .6 seconds). This step is included in this example because

most receivers and amps take time to “cycle up” and cannot

receive any commands, such as input, until the device is ready.

This example enabled the other steps of the macro to run while

the Audio device is “cycling up.”

14. Press SAT. (This selects the “SAT” input on the RV-8.)

15. Press HOME.

16. Press SAT. (Back to this device to enter the appropriate channel.)

17. Press 1, then 3, then 5. (Then press the ENT button if the cable

device requires it.)

18. Press CH UP to save the macro.

19. Press HOME twice. Press M1 to test the macro. It should turn on

the RV-8, then the TV, then the satellite box, then change the input

to SAT on the RV-8, then change the channel to 135.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-12

Note:

A macro can end on any page, including the HOME page. In the previous

example, the macro was ended on the SAT page before saving it, as this

was the desired endpoint.

PROGRAMMING “PUNCH THROUGH” FUNCTIONS

The RV-8 volume control can be used in a different mode using the

volume “punch through” feature. You can also have channel “punch

through” (Channel Up, Channel Down) as well as eight VCR (or DVD)

transport buttons (Play, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, Skip-, Skip+,

Pause, Record) operate in another mode such as SAT, CD and RV-8

MAIN modes.

To program “punch through” functions:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

Note:

When using “Punch Through,” think of the first device selected as the

device that now controls the functions, and think of the second device

as the device you want to control those functions. You are taking the

controls of the second device and “punching them through” to the

first device.

3. Press the VOL button on the LCD for Volume Punch Through, the

PLAY button for Transport Punch Through and the CH button for

Channel Punch Through.

4. Select the device you wish to “punch through” to (first device

example - television or satellite receiver).

5. Select the device you wish to “punch through” from (second

device example - RV-8 MAIN).

You are punching through the controls of the second device to

the device that is currently being controlled by any other

buttons. For example, for VOL you are “punching through” the

controls of the RV-8 MAIN VOL to the TV or SAT, enabling you

to control the RV-8 MAIN VOL when in the TV or SAT screen.

6. Punch Through is saved when the second device is pressed.

7. Repeat from step 2 to program Punch Through for other devices.

8. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit fromthis

mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again.

9. Repeat from step 5 to “punch through” any other devices or

learned buttons.

10. Press the HOME button to exit to main Punch Through mode.

Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

ERASING MACRO FUNCTIONS

To erase M1, M2, M3, Power, System Off buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the MACRO button.

4. To erase all of the macro buttons in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL

button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

5. To erase just one of the macros, press the KEY button at step 4 and

then one of the M1, M2, M3, POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons to

erase the macro functions from that button.

6. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

7. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

RV-8 Appendix C

C-13

ERASING FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

To erase favorite channel buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button.

4. To erase all the favorite channel buttons in the RV-8 remote, press

the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD

screen.

5. To erase one button, press the KEY button. Press the individual

button you want to erase and continue with any other individual

buttons you want to erase.

6. Repeat from Step 5 to erase any favorite channel buttons.

7. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

8. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

ERASE MACRO FUNCTIONS FROM DEVICE BUTTONS

To erase macro function from device buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the MACRO button.

4. Press the KEY button.

5. Press one of the 10 DEVICE buttons from which you wish to erase

the macro function. Once the device button has been pushed the

macro has been erased. The LCD will flash “ERASED!”

6. Exit from Macro mode by pressing the HOME button and then

exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

ERASING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS

To erase “punch through” functions:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the VOL button for Volume Punch Through, the PLA button

for Transport Punch Through or the CH button for Channel Punch

Through.

4. Press the device button from which you wish to erase Punch

Through.

5. Press the same device button again.

6. Punch through is erased when the same device button is pressed

the second time.

7. Repeat from step 2 to erase the Punch Through for other devices.

8. Exit from Punch Through mode by pressing the HOME button and

then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

EDIT TEXT ON FUNCTION/DEVICE BUTTONS

To edit text on function or device buttons:

1. Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the DEVICE button to display the function buttons for that

device.

4. Press the function button on which you wish to write or edit text.

You can also go to the second page of the device by press ing the

PAGE button.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-14

5. To edit DEVICE button text, skip Steps 3 and 4 and press the PAGE

button before selecting the Device button.

6. The character to be changed will blink. To change the character

use the number pad buttons on the remote control. The

characters assigned to each number pad button are shown below.

It will cycle to a different character each time the same number

pad button is pressed.

Note:

Move the cursor left or right using the joystick. Delete a current

character by using the cursor down on the joystick. Using the “cursor

down” technique is a quick way to delete all of the text on a label.

7. Save the text by pressing the button you were writing on (the same

function button selected in step 3 or device button in step 4).

8. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

EDIT TEXT FOR FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

To edit text for favorite channel buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button and then the favorite channel button on

which you wish to write text. There are five LCD pages of favorite

channels. Select the page you wish to write on by pressing the

PAGE button.

4. The character to be changed on the button you selected will blink

and you can change the character using the number pad buttons

on the remote control. The characters assigned to each number

pad button are shown in the previous column. It will cycle to a

different character each time the same number pad button is

pressed.

5. Save the edited text by pressing the same function button selected

in step 4.

6. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

RECALLING THE PREPROGRAMMED THREE-DIGIT NUMBER

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

3. The LCD display will alternately flash device names and the three-

digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then

exit to the SETUP mode.

4. Before the 10 seconds are up, pressing the HOME button on the

remote will stop the flashing and exit to the SETUP mode.

5. Exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

ERASING LEARNED BUTTONS

To erase learned buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the LEARN button.

1. A B C

5. M N O

9. Y Z (Blank)

2. D E F

6. P Q R

0. + - <>, etc

3. G H I

7. S T U

4. J K L

8. V W X

RV-8 Appendix C

C-15

4. If you wish to erase all the learned functions in the RV-8 remote,

press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next

LCD screen.

5. To erase all the buttons in a single device or an individual button in

the device, press the DEVICE button.

6. Press the device button (TV, VCR, MAIN, etc.) to erase the

button(s) from the device.

Note:

Press the PAGE button and then press the DEVICE button (TV, VCR,

etc.) to erase the learned function in the device button itself.

7. Press the ALL button to erase all the learned buttons in the device

and press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

8. Press a single button to erase individual buttons one at a time. This

will show all the functions in the device. Press the button you wish

to erase.

PROGRAMMING THE BACKLIGHT TO TURN OFF

The backlight can be toggled On and Off by pushing the LIGHT

button on the top right side of the remote. It can also be set to turn off

at a predetermined time.

To program the backlight:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the LIGHT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Using the number pad buttons, enter the desired backlight time

(in seconds). It can go up to 99 seconds. Save the time by pressing

the button to the right of the time just assigned.

4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button.

Note:

The time entered in SETUP for the backlight to go off is extended each

time a button is pushed. The light will turn off at the predetermined

interval after the last button has been pushed.

CLONING THE RV-8 REMOTE CONTROL

To clone the remote from another remote:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the CLONE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press either the SEND or RECV button depending upon the role of

the remote control. If the RV-8 remote is to be copied from, press

the SEND button. If it is to be copied to, press the RECV button.

4. To clone the entire remote, press the ALL button. To clone only

one device at a time, press the DEVICE button.

5. Press the DEVICE button to show all of the devices. Press the

device button you wish to clone.

6. Set the RV-8 remote head-to-head with another RV-8 remote. Each

unit should be in either cloning from or cloning to mode, based

on the above steps.

7. Press the START button on both units to begin cloning. It will take

about 40 seconds to complete the cloning. The LCD will flash

“GOOD” upon completion.

8. Exit from the Cloning mode by pressing the HOME button and

then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

again.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-16

ADJUSTING THE LCD CONTRAST

To adjust the LCD contrast:

Pressing the HOME button and Up on the joystick simultaneously will

make the LCD contrast darker. Pressing the HOME button and Down

on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast brighter.

BATTERY LIFE

Under normal operating conditions, the batteries will last

approximately six months. If the batteries are running low, there will

be reduced range from the remote, commands that are not sent

properly, or are not sent at all. The backlighting of the LCD screen and

the buttons may be diminished. Should any of these occur, replace the

batteries immediately. To ensure proper performance of the remote,

use four new AAA alkaline batteries. However, the worn batteries

should be replaced with a fresh set as soon as possible. Do not mix

new and used batteries.

Note:

If the batteries are running low, the LCD displays “LOW BATTERY”

when the POWER button is pressed, or when the HOME and ENT but-

tons are pressed simultaneously.

The remote has an internal memory lock system that retains all of the

programs and learned functions for an extended period of time in the

event of battery loss or replacement.

CAUTION!

The LCD screen is breakable glass. Do not tap the LCD

screen to activate devices. Use the rubber buttons beside

the labels on the screen.

The RV-8 remote control is not waterproof. Never immerse

it in water. Keep the LCD screen dry. Immediately wipe off

any spilled liquid.

Do not expose the RV-8 remote to extreme temperatures.

Keep it away from any heat sources.

Avoid dropping the remote control.

Clean the LCD screen with a soft cloth. Never use abrasives

or cleaning solutions on the soft cloth.

RECALLING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES FOR THE RV-8

To recall the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

3. The LCD display will alternatively flash device names and the

three-digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds

and then exit to the SETUP mode. Make sure that the audio code

has the correct (default) number.

4. The MAIN zone default audio code should be 001. The ZONE 2

default audio code is 302, and the ZONE 3 default audio code is

303. If one of these codes has inadvertently been changed,

reprogram the codes as described below.

RV-8 Appendix C

C-17

REPROGRAMMING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES TO DEFAULT CODES

To reprogram the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.

2. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. The remote should flash SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Press the button for the zone you wish to reprogram.

4. The remote should flash FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD

screen. Select the MAIN zone button.

5. The remote should flash ENTER NUMBER. The correct (default)

audio codes for the RV-8 zones are as follows: MAIN zone is 001,

ZONE 2 is 302 and ZONE 3 is 303.

6. Enter the correct code.

7. Press SAVE on the right of the LCD screen to enter and save the

audio code for the zone.

8. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button

and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

Appendix C Lexicon

C-18

THREE-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES

AUDIO

Manufacturer Codes

ADC 007

ADCOM 082 092 225 161 269

AIWA 018 104 170 202 203 213 211 188

AKAI 138 189

AMC 125 126 127 128 258 281 282

AMEND 054

AMX 196

ANGSTROM 142

ARCAM 141

AUDIO ACCESS 147

AUDIO ALCHEMY 135

AUDIO DESIGN 194 221 011

AUDIO EASE 021 196 207

AUDIO FILE 071

AUDIO MATRIX 167

AUDIO SOURCE 273

AUDIO TECHNICA 134

B & K 096 097

BOSE 070 170 224

BRYSTON 023

CARVER 006 028 061 071 201 214 226 180 185 022 029 077 284

CASIO 076

CHIRO 140

CINEMA SOUND 034 134

CITATION 148 272

CLARION 026

CURTIS MATHES 076

DENON 002 034 109 215 229 230 027 037 234 259

EIGER 149

ELAN 057

ENLIGHTENED AUDIO 099 098

AUDIO

Manufacturer Codes

FISHER 047 214 180 182

FOSGATE 062 231

GE 056 260

GOLDSTAR 008

HAFLER 174

HARMAN KARDON 231 233 254 153 154 118 121 227 277

INKEL 197

JBL 263

JCPENNY 076 216

JEFF ROWLAND 206

JENSEN 058

JVC 240 163 191 114 266 279

KENWOOD 026 066 145 146 181 190 197 192 182 199 151 222 180

005 280

KINERGETICS 220 140

KOSS 216

KRELL 150 072

KYOCERA 007

LEXICON 120 235 236 237

LINN 124

LUXMAN 137 139 052 165 115 004 009

LXI 076 056

MAGNAVOX 038 164 152 208

MARANTZ 006 028 031 040 063 185 186 251 265

MCINTOSH 238

MCS 076

MERIDIAN 100 012 013

MITSUBISHI 242 243 204

MONDIAL 157 158 042 043 081 112

MYRYAD 276

NAD 186 113 283

NAKAMICHI 111 244 245 172 183

NEC 176

ONKYO 017 046 064 107 108 187 079 080 090 179 209 270 275

OPTIMUS 026 041 138

RV-8 Appendix C

C-19

AUDIO

Manufacturer Codes

PANASONIC 032 195 219 177

PARASOUND 129 130 132 261

PHAST 196

PHILIPS 249 250 251 063

PIONEER 014 033 039 044 045 050 069 159 168 116 035 078 198

PROCEED 144 268

RCA 010 048 117 156 067

REALISTIC 019 056 073 075 095

REVOX 162

ROTEL 074 083 085

SAMSUNG 016

SANSUI 040 048 110 119 065 228

SANYO 047 059

SCOTT 019 091

SEARS 076

SHARP 026 094 131 175 181

SHERWOOD 024 038 055 102 103 105 106 051 030

SONY 018 093 223 247 248 160 166 015 101 184 218 271

SOUNDESIGN 036

SOUNDSTREAM 084 088

SSI 068

SUMO 171

TAEKWANG 138

TEAC 005 019 049 111 212 217

TECHNICS 122 176 193 219 178 177 200 257 262

THETA DIGITAL 136

TOSHIBA 060 087 198 278

WARDS 180

YAMAHA 026 253 169 067 173 205 264 232 089 264 274 285

ZENITH 143 210

DVD

Manufacturer Codes

APEX DIGITAL 087

DENON 007 080

GE 026 027

HARMAN KARDON 084

JVC 012

LG 091 057 074

MAGNAVOX 066

MARANTZ 083

MITSUBISHI 017

NAD 088

ONKYO 076 035

PANASONIC 021 042

PHILIPS 066

PIONEER 023 092 107 108

PROCEED 086

PROSCAN 026 027

RCA 026 027

SAMSUNG 056 070

SHARP 094

SONY 033

THETA DIGITAL 032

THOMPSON 026 027

TOSHIBA 035 034

YAMAHA 042 089

ZENITH 057 074 091

Appendix C Lexicon

C-20

SAT

Manufacturer Codes

ALPHASTAR 123

AMPLICA 050

BIRDVIEW 129 113 051 126

BSR 053

CAPETRONICS 053

CHANNEL MASTER 013 014 015 018 036 055

CHAPARRAL 008 009 012 077

CITOH 054

CURTIS MATHES 050

DRAKE 005 006 007 010 011 112 116 141 052

DX ANTENNA 024 046 056 076

ECHOSTAR 038 040 057 058 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 122

ELECTROHOME 089

EUROSAT 114

FUJITSU 017 021 022 027 133 134

GENERAL ELECTRIC 151 106 150

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 003 004 016 029 031 059 101 148

HITACHI 139 140

HOME CABLE 080 044 029

HOUSTON TRACKER 033 037 039 104 057 051

HUGHES 068 154

HYTEK 053

HYUNDAI 149

ICR 023

JANIEL 060 147

KATHREIN 108

LEGEND 057

LUTRON 132

LUXOR 144 062

MACOM 010 059 063 064 065

MEMOREX 057

NEXTWAVE 028 124 125

NORSAT 069 070

PACE 143

PANASONIC 142 060

PANSAT 121

PERSONAL CABLE 117

SAT

Manufacturer Codes

PHILIPS 071 152 153

PL 023 026

PRESIDENT 019 102

PRIMESTAR 110 030

PROSAT 072

PROSCAN 151 106 150

RCA 151 106 150

REALISTIC 043 074

SAMSUNG 123

SATELLITE SERVICE 028 035 047 085

SONY 103

STARCAST 041

SUPERGUIDE 020 124 125

TEECOM 023 026 075 087 088 090 107 130 137

TOSHIBA 002 127

TOWN & COUNTRY 023 026

UNIDEN 016 025 042 043 044 045 048 049 078 079 080 086 101

135 136

VIEWSTAR 115

WINEGARD 128 146

ZENITH 081 082 083 084 091 120

RV-8 Appendix C

C-21

VCR

Manufacturer Codes

AIWA 034 161

AKAI 016 043 046 124 125 146

AMPRO 072

ANAM 031

AUDIO DYNAMICS 012 023 039 043

BROOKSONIC 035 037 129

CANON 028 031

CAPEHART 108

CRAIG 003 040 135

CURTIS MATHES 031 041

DAEWOO 005 007 010 065 108 110 111 112 116 117 119

DAYTRON 108

DBX 012 023 039 043

DYNATECH 034 053

ELECTROHOME 059

EMERSON’ 006 017 025 027 029 031 034 035 036 037 046 101 129

131 138 153 162 116

FISHER 003 008 009 010

FUNAI 034

GE 031 063 072 107 109 144 147

GO VIDEO 132 136 155 040 115

GOLDSTAR 012 013 020 101 106 114 123

HARMAN KARDON 012 045

HITACHI 004 018 026 034 043 063 137 150 160 013

INSTANTREPLAY 031

JCL 031

JCPENNY 012 013 015 040 066 101

JENSEN 043

JVC 012 031 043 048 050 055 060 130 150 152

KENWOOD 014 048 034 047

LLOYD 034

LXI 003 009 017 034 106

MAGIN 040

VCR

Manufacturer Codes

MAGNAVOX 031 034 041 067 068 156 164

MARANTZ 012 031 067 069

MARTA 101

MATSUI 027 030

MEI 031

MEMOREX 003 010 014 031 034 053 072 101 102 134 139

MGA 045 046 059

MINOLTA 013 020

MITSUBISHI 013 020 045 046 051 059 061 142 151 049

MTC 034 040

MULTITECH 024 034

NEC 012 023 039 043 048

NORDMENDE 043

OPTONICA 053 054

ORION 025

PANASONIC 066 070 083 133 140 145 157 163 074

PENTAX 013 020 031 063

PHILCO 031 034 067

PHILIPS 031 034 054 067 071 101

PILOT 101

PIONEER 013 021 048

PORTLAND 108

PULSAR 072

QUARTZ 002 014

QUASAR 066 145 075

RADIO SHACK 123

RCA 013 020 041 107 109 140 144 145 147 034 040 158

REALISTIC 003 008 010 014 031 040 053 054 101

RICO 058

RUNCO 148

SALORA 014

SAMSUNG 032 040 066 102 104 107 109 112 113 115 120 122 125

SANSUI 022 043 048 135

Appendix C Lexicon

C-22

VCR

Manufacturer Codes

SANYO 003 007 010 014 134 102

SCOTT 017 037 112 129 131

SEARS 003 008 009 010 013 014 081 101 017 073 112

SHARP 031 054 149 159 165

SHINTOM 024

SIGNATURE 034

SONY 003 031 052 056 057 058 076 077 078 149 154

SOUNDESIGN 034

STS 013

SYLVANIA 031 034 059 067

SYMPHONIC 034

TANDY 010 034

TATUNG 039 043

TEAC 034 039 043

TECHNICS 031 070

TEKNIKA 019 031 034 101

THOMAS 034

TMK 006

TOSHIBA 008 013 042 047 059 079 082 112 131 081

TOTEVISION 040 101

UNITECH 040

VECTOR RESEARCH 012

VICTOR 048

VIDEO CONCEPTS 012 034 046 141

VIDEOSONIC 040

WARDS 003 013 017 024 031 034 040 053 054 131

YAMAHA 012 034 039 043

ZENITH 034 048 056 058 072 080 101

Manufacturer Codes

ADMIRAL 072 081 161 160

AKAL 197 146

AMARK 112 143

AMPRO 073 167 157 183

AMSTRAD 052

ANAM 043 054 056 080 112 131

AOC 197 004 112 058

AUDIOVOX 076

BLAUPUNKT 088

CAIRN 201

CANDLE 197 002 003 004

CAPEHART 058

CETRONIC 043

CITIZEN 197 002 003 004 043 101 103 143

CLASSIC 043

CONCERTO 004

CONTEC 043 050 051

CORONADO 143

CRAIG 043 054

CROWN 043 143

CURTIS MATHES 197 101 004 143

CXC 043

DAEWOO 004 016 043 044 076 103 114 125 127 143

DAYTRON 004 143

DWIN 177

DYNASTY 043

DYNATECH 062

EIKI 187

ELECTROHOME 024 076 143 196

EMERSON 197 004 005 028 043 047 048 050 051 076 096 143 151

153 154 155

FISHER 007 057

RV-8 Appendix C

C-23

Manufacturer Codes

FUJITSU 198

FUNAI 028 043

FUTURETECH 043

GE 197 008 009 034 056 073 074 130 144 155 160 161 165

004 091 157 183

GOLDSTAR 004 102 106 112 113 116 119 127 143

HALL MARK 004

HITACHI 004 009 010 011 012 023 075 143 158 163 166 072

INFINITY 164

JBL 164

JCPENNY 197 004 008 009 024 030 065 101 143 156 160

JENSEN 013

JVC 034 038 070 083 145 199

KEC 043

KENWOOD 197 070

KLOSS 002 059

KMC 143

KTV 197 043 143 154

LODGENET 072

LOGIK 072

LUXMAN 004

LXI 166 007 015 052 081 160 164

MAGNAVOX 197 003 004 022 059 060 061 063 064 127 160 164 094

MARANTZ 197 164

MATSUI 164

MEMOREX 007 072 004

METZ 088

MGA 197 004 024 028 042

MINERVA 088

MITSUBISHI 004 024 028 040 042 109 124 146 191

MTC 197 004 062 101

NAD 015 025

Manufacturer Codes

NEC 132 130 134 197 040 016 024 056 019

NIKEI 043

ONKING 043

ONWA 043

OPTONICA 019 081

ORION 096

PANASONIC 034 056 080 092 164

PHILCO 197 003 024 056 059 060 063 064 164 004

PHILIPS 197 003 004 005 038 059 093 164 127

PIONEER 197 018 023 025 116 135 190 203 204

PORTLAND 004 143

PROSCAN 144 160 161 165 167

PROTON 004 058 131 143 171 173 193

QUASAR 034 056 092

RADIO SHACK 019 043 143 004 127

RCA 160 161 165 065 156 144 197 004 023 024 056 074 152

REALISTIC 007 019 043 047

ROCTEC 186

RUNCO 168 169 178 179 180 181 182 183 073 157

SAMPO 197 058 004 202

SAMSUNG 004 050 089 101 105 127 143 160

SANYO 166 007 020 053 057 082 187

SCOTT 004 028 043 048 143

SEARS 015 030 004 007 028 057 143 094 160 082 165 166

SELECO 189 200

SHARP 170 081 019 028 029 014 004 022 143 175

SIEMENS 088

SIGNATURE 072

SONY 070 085 139 147 126 185 194

SOUNDESIGN 004 028 003 043

SPECTRICON 112

SSS 004 043

Appendix C Lexicon

C-24

Manufacturer Codes

SUPRE MACY 002

SYLVANIA 197 003 059 060 063 064 164 044 160 127

TANDY 081

TATUNG 056 062

TECHNICS 034 080

TECHWOOD 004

TEKNIKA 002 003 004 024 028 043 072 101 143

TELEFUNKEN 037 046 086 087

TELERENT 072

TERA 172

TMK 004

TOSHIBA 007 015 030 040 062 101 138

TOTEVISION 143

UNIVERSAL 008 009

VIDEO CONCEPTS 146

VIDIKRON 174 184 188 192

VIDTECH 004

WARDS 004 008 009 019 028 060 061 063 064 072 074 143 164

034

WESTING HOUSE 076

YAMAHA 197 004

YORK 004

YUPITERU 043

ZENITH 072 073 095 103 157 183

ZONDA 112

Manufacturer Codes

ADCOM 062 042

AIWA 059 065 088 089 105 122 170 187

AKAI 085 195 202

AMC 231 232

AMEND 118

ARCAM 238

AUDIO ACCESS 119 147

AUDIO EASE 165

AUDIO TECHNICA 046

BSR 037 057

CALIFORNIA AUDIO 103 008

CAPETRONIC 063

CARRERA 057 080

CARVER 185 041 044 050 086 107 130 134 135 138 139 203 204

167

CASIO 111 182

CLARINETTE 182

CREEK 159

CROWN 035

DENON 002 123

EMERSON 042 069 102

FISHER 050 185 134 008

FRABA 111

GENEXXA 010 069 102

GOLDSTAR 080

HAITAI 093

HARMAN KARDON 018 033 047 208

HITACHI 042 175

INKEL 130 143 144

JC PENNEY 014 061 092 141

JENSEN 158

JVC 004 022 136 163 213 214 242 243

RV-8 Appendix C

C-25

Manufacturer Codes

KENWOOD 185 007 023 055 071 072 142 137

KOSS 061

KRELL 241

KYOCERA 005

LOTTE 102

LUXMAN 011 028 070 076

LXI 059

MAGNAVOX 044 107

MARANTZ 027 041 044 051 077 107 209

MCINTOSH 212

MCS 014 073 092

MEMOREX 010

MISSION 044 107

MITSUBISHI 179

MITSUMI 153

MODULAIRE 182

MONDIAL 147

MYRYAD 244

NAD 006 005 067 178

KAKAMICHI 217 218 219 095

NEC 014 062

NIKKO 046

NSM 044 107

ONKYO 030 038 039 168 169

OPTIMUS 010 050 057 058 081 082 083 085 093 195

PANASONIC 103 201 172 008 068

PARASOUND 233

PHILIPS 041 044

PIONEER 010 020 025 056 174 175 176

PROCEED 239

PROTON 044 107 228

QUASAR 103 008

Manufacturer Codes

RADIO SHACK 182

RCA 017 042 150

REALISTIC 042 050 051 102 181 182 187

ROTEL 044 107 161 178 250

SAE 044 107

SANSUI 044 069 107 128 171 190 125

SANYO 050

SCOTT 069 102

SHARP 026 031 051 066

SHERWOOD 003 019 051 096 112 115 119 166

SIGNATURE 033

SONY 048 081 097 126 133 177 225 226 164

SOUNDESIGN 251

SUMO 155

SYLVANIA 044 107

SYMPHONIC 052 181

TAEKWANG 195 085

TANDY 010

TEAC 015 034 036 051 052 101 131 140 079

TECHNICS 060 103 200 172 184 008 068

TECHWOOD 076

THETA DIGITAL 234 235

TOSHIBA 006 067 091 160 148

VECTOR RESEARCH 080

VICTOR 004 022 114 124

WARDS 185 033

YAMAHA 024 046 054 186 183 245

YORX 182

Appendix C Lexicon

C-26

Manufacturer Codes

DENON 206 207

FUNAI 120

KENWOOD 152 013

MAGNAVOX 032 121

MARANTZ 211

MITSUBISHI 121

NAD 121

OPTIMUS 049 013

PANASONIC 113

PHILIPS 032

PIONEER 106 117 121

RADIO SHACK 120

RCA 002

REALISTIC 049

RUNCO 127

SANYO 075

SHARP 152 013

SONY 053 110

TECHNICS 113

THETA DIGITAL 032

TOSHIBA 152 106

YAMAHA 043 129

Note:

The LD codes are stored in DVD.

PHONO

Manufacturer Codes

3M 152

AIWA 164

ARCHER 155

AUTON 191

DMX 156

DRAPER SCREEN 204

DWIN 080

EVERQUEST 206

EXTRON 151

FAROUDJA 184

FUJI 209

JERROLD 153

JVC 185

KENWOOD 185

LITE-TOUCH 208

LUTRON 077 158 159

MAKITA 186 201

MINDPATH 205

NILES 160 187

NSM 161

PIANO DISC PLUS 085

PHILIPS 090

POLK AUDIO 162

REPLAY 075

RUSSOUND 081

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 156 163

SIMA 082

SOLO ELECTRONICS 207

SOMFY 078 079

SONY 104 164 165 166

STARCOM 153

TURBOSCAN 167

VELODYNE 203

X-10 093 183

XANTECH 168 169 170 171 172 188 189

RV-8 Appendix C

C-27

CABLE

Manufacturer Codes

ABC 103 003 004 039 042 046 053

AMERICAST 099

ANTRONIX 014

ARCHER 005 007 014

BELL SOUTH 099

CENTURION 092

CENTURY 007

CITIZEN 007

COMBANO 080 081

COMSAT 074

COMTRONICS 030

DIGICABLE 101

EAGLE 020 030 040

EASTERN 057 066

ECHOSTAR 106

ELECTRICORD 032

GEMINI 008 054

GENERAL ELECTRIC 072

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 103 074 104

GNC 099

GOLDEN CHANNEL 030

HAMLIN 049 050 055

HITACHI 103 055

JERROLD 103 002 003 004 008 009 010 069 074

MAGNAVOX 010 012 064 079 095 094

MEDIA ONE 107

MEMOREX 052

MITSUBISHI 102

M-NET 037

MOVIE TIME 028 032

NOVAPLEX 092

NSC 015 028 038 071

CABLE

Manufacturer Codes

OAK 031 037 053

PANASONIC 044 047

PARAGON 052

PHILIPS 006 012 013 020 085 095

PIONEER 103 034 051 063 076 105

PRUCER 059

RCA 047

RECOTON 098

REGAL 049 050

REGENCY 057

SAMSUNG 030

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 003 011 041 042 043 045 046

SIGNAL 030

SIGNATURE 103

SL MARX 030

SONY 096

SPRUCER 047 078

STARCOM 002 004 008 009

STARGATE 008 030 097 104

TADIRAN 030

TIME WARNER 043

TOCOM 039 040 056

TOSHIBA 052

UNIKA 007 014

UNITED CABLE 004 053

UNIVERSAL 005 007 014 032 035

VIEWSTAR 012 015 018 086 087 088 089

ZENITH 052 060 093 100

Appendix C Lexicon

C-28

TAPE

Manufacturer Codes

AIWA 015 071 100 114

CARVER 006 008 027 024 036

DENON 105 227 229

FISHER 064

GOLDSTAR 011

HARMAN KARDON 233

JVC 106 116 239 240

KENWOOD 005 013 023 026 064 145 146 181 190

LINN 124

LUXMAN 035 137 139

MAGNAVOX 027

MARANTZ 014 027 056 065 087

MCINTOSH 238

MITSUBISHI 242 243

NAD 029 048

NAKAMICHI 244 245 025

ONKYO 002 012 016 017 018 019 115

OPTIMUS 026 054 055

PANASONIC 007 010 032 088 195

PHILIPS 027 087

PIONEER 003 039 047 050 066 098 222

QUASAR 007 088

SANSUI 027 113 119 224

SHARP 026 057 131 175 181

SHERWOOD 038 004 028 030 033 034

SONY 020 022 052 084 089

TEAC 009 059 212

TECHNICS 007 010 076 088 109 122 199

TOSHIBA 112

VICTOR 106

YAMAHA 021 026 031 067 040

Appendix

Installation Worksheet................................................................D-2

Appendix D Lexicon

D-2

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET

INPUT SETUP DVD1 DVD2 SAT VCR TV CD TUNER PHONO

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

5.1a

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

ANLG BYP

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

RV-8 Appendix D

D-3

SPEAKER SETUP CUSTOM SETUP THX SETUP SPEAKER DISTANCES LEVELS CALIBRATION

FRONT LEFT/RIGHT THX 80Hz

CENTER THX 80Hz

SIDE LEFT/RIGHT THX 80Hz

REAR LEFT/RIGHT

SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz

ULTRA2SUB

BGC

ASA

UNITS

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

SUB LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

I/O CONFIG SETTINGS

Analog Inputs 8 STEREO INPUTS 5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

Amplifier Outputs MAIN 7.1 MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0 MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

Appendix D Lexicon

D-4

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET (continued)

DISPLAY SETUP TRIGGER SETUP TUNER SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY Circle all parameters set to ON. REGION

STATUS REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

PRO LOGIC

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a SurEX

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

SCAN SENS

POSITION

FORMAT LOCK OPTIONS

BACKGROUND MODES

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY AUDIO CNTRL

STATUS SETUP

BRIGHTNESS

A/V SYNC DELAY AUDIO CONTROLS

CUSTOM NAME BASS

EDIT CUSTOM NAME TREBLE

TILT EQ

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP LOUDNESS

MAIN PWR ON BALANCE

MUTE LEVEL FADER

ZONE 2 PWR ON ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE 3 PWR ON ZONE3 BALANCE

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

RV-8 Appendix D

D-5

3-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES WORKSHEET

COMPONENT MANUFACTURER CODE(S) USED

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

PHONO

Appendix D Lexicon

D-6

PREPROGRAMMED LCD TEXT FOR OTHER DEVICES

DVD1

PROG MENU

DISPL SETUP

CLEAR MEMO

REPEA TITLE

A-B SHUFF

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

SKIP+

SKIP-

LEFT





EJECT

PAUSE

DISPLAY

ENTER

DVD2

RANDO ANGLE

RETUR S-ON

AUDIO S-CHA

TIME SLOW+

SOUND SLOW-

PAGE 2

SAT

FAUCH ACTIO

ALPHA REC

NEXT SERVI

VIEW BACK

ALT HOP

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

SAT

FETCH HELP

B F

C G

PAGE 2

VCR

V/T INPUT

DISP SLOW

VCR-P SLOW+

F. ADV SLOW-

XPLA EJECT

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW





RECORD

PAUSE

DISPLAY

ENTER

VCR

PROG T-SPE

COUNT A-TRK

RESET A-CH

CLEAR ADD

T-REC DELET

PAGE 2

RV-8 Appendix D

D-7

T/V INPUT

SLEEP A-CH

CC ADD

CC-SN DELET

RESET ANT

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

PRE CH

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

P-ON P-OFF

SWAP STILL

SOURC LOCAT

POSI FREEZ

PAGE 2

PROG INTRO

DISPL TIME

CLEAR FADER

REPEA EDIT

A-B

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

TRACK+

TRACK-

RANDOM

SKIP-

SKIP+

PLAY

STOP

REW





EJECT

PAUSE

DISPLAY

DISC

DISK 1 DISK 6

DISK 2

DISK 3

DISK 4

DISK 5

PAGE 2

PHONO

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

, MENU

, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

DISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE CH

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW





RECORD

PAUSE

DISPLAY

ENTER

PHONO

PAGE 2

Numerics

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

2.0 ENCODING parameter, 2-34

2CH BYPASS listening mode, 6-34

2CH BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-32

2-CH MODE menu, 3-15

2-CH Parameter, D-2

2-CH parameter, 3-12

2CH STATUS menu, 2-30

2-CH SURROUND listening mode, 6-15

2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-15

5, 6-26

5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

5.1 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-23

5.1 ANALOG STATUS menu, 2-33

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 6-16

5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-17

5.1 L7 TV listening mode, 6-17

5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 parameter, 3-62

5.1 MONO listening mode, 6-24

5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-23

5.1 MONO SURR listening mode, 6-24

5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-21

5.1a 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-31

5.1a L7 FILM listening mode, 6-29

5.1a L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-30

5.1a MODE menu, 3-16

5.1a parameter, 3-12

5.1a STANDARD listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX SurEX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-30

5.1-channel connectors, 2-7

8 STEREO INPUTS option, 3-60

A/V SYNC DELAY parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

about the RV-8, 1-2

AC input connector, 2-9

ACADEMY FILTER parameter, 6-15, 6-23, 6-39

adjusting the LCD contrast, C-16

advanced speaker array, 3-35

amplifier channel status, 2-13

amplifier output connectors, 2-13

amplifier outputs, 2-7

amplifier overview, 2-13

analog audio input connectors, 2-7

ANALOG BYPASS parameter, 3-18

ANALOG IN parameter, 3-7, 3-8, D-2

anamorphic trigger signals, 3-18

ANLG IN LVL parameter, 3-7, 3-9, 3-23

ANLOG BYPASS parameter, 3-17

arrow buttons, 2-15

ASA parameter, 3-29, 3-35

assigning input connectors, 3-7

audio controls

BALANCE parameter, 4-6

BASS parameter, 4-2

CLEAR PRESET parameter, 5-3

FADER parameter, 4-6

LISTEN TO PRESET parameter, 5-3

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-4

NAME parameter, 5-3

TILT EQ parameter, 4-4

TREBLE parameter, 4-2

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-6

AUDIO CONTROLS menu, 4-2, D-4

audio output connectors, 2-8, 2-9

AUTO, 6-4

AUTO AZIMUTH parameter, 6-4, 6-39

AUTO FREQUENCY parameter, 3-78

AUTO GAIN parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens, 3-48

Autoload, 2-12

AUTOLOAD parameter, 3-74

Automatic Calibration, 3-36

Automatic calibration using microphones, 3-37

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-20, D-4

BALANCE parameter, 4-2, D-4

BASS CONTENT parameter, 6-13, 6-39

BASS ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

BASS parameter, 4-2, D-4

frequency response graph, 4-3

BASS PEAK LIMITERS, 3-53

BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, 3-58, D-3

BASS RT parameter, 6-12, 6-39

BASS XOVER parameter, 6-39

battery installation, 1-6

battery life, C-16

BGC parameter, 3-29, 3-35

BIT RATE parameter, 2-34

boundary gain compensation, 3-35

BRIGHTNESS parameter, D-4

CAL NOISE parameter, 3-58, D-3

Calibration

automatic, 3-36

manual, 3-53

CALIBRATION parameter, 6-13, 6-39

Index

Index Lexicon

I-2

CATHEDRAL listening mode, 6-12

CENTER DEPTH parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-40

CENTER MIX LVL parameter, 2-34

CENTER MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

Center output connector, 2-7

CENTER parameter, 3-29, 3-31, 6-37, 6-40

changing input names, 3-5

CHANNELS parameter, 2-34

checking microphones, 3-41

CHURCH listening mode, 6-12

CLEAR ALL parameter, 3-75

CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

COMPONENT IN parameter, 3-7, 3-11

COMPONENT OSD parameter, 3-17, 3-20, 3-21, D-2

component video input connectors, 2-7

Composite video connectors, 2-8

COMPRESSION parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-40

CONCERT HALL listening mode, 6-11

CROSSOVER SETUP menu, 3-26

CTR WIDTH parameter, 6-8, 6-40

CUSTOM menu, 6-37, 6-40

CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67

CUSTOM parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10,

6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-40

CUSTOM SETUP Menu, 3-29

CUSTOM SETUP menu, 3-26, D-3

custom speaker setups, 3-26

CUSTOM vs PRESET listening modes, 6-37, 6-40

Declaration of Conformity, A-4

DIALOG OFFSET parameter, 2-34

DIG OUT RATE parameter, 3-23, 3-24

digital audio input connectors, 2-8

digital audio output connectors, 2-9

DIGITAL BYPASS parameter, 3-23, 3-24

DIGITAL IN parameter, 3-7

DIGITAL STATUS menu, 2-32

DIMENSION parameter, 6-8, 6-40

direct station access, 2-10

DISPLAY parameter, 3-76

DISPLAY SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-63

DISTANCES & LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

DISTANCES option, 3-36, 3-48

documentation conventions, 1-ii

DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, 3-15

Dolby DIGITAL parameter, 3-12

DOLBY PL + THX listening mode, 6-9

DOLBY PLII MOV listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, 6-9, 6-9

DOLBY STATUS menu, 2-30

DTS 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS listening mode, 6-28

DTS Neo

6 + THX listening mode, 6-10

6 CIN listening mode, 6-10

6 MUSIC listening mode, 6-10

DTS STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-28

DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode, 6-27

DTS-ES 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS-ES DECODING parameter, 6-25

DTS-ES DISCR listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES MODE menu, 3-16

DTS-ES parameter, 3-12

DTS-ES STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS-ES THX listening mode, 6-27

Dynamic listening modes, 3-13, 6-3

EARLY RFLX LVL parameter, 6-41

EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

EDIT INPUT NAME menu, 3-5

editing presets, 2-12

EFFECT LVL parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-23, 6-

ES DECODING parameter, 6-25, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-40,

6-42, 6-44, 6-46

ES ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EX DECODING parameter, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22, 6-41

EX ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-57

factory-default settings, restoring, 7-4

FADER parameter, 4-2, D-4

FORMAT DETECT parameter, 3-21

FORMAT parameter, D-4

FREQUENCY option, 3-76

Front L/R output connector, 2-7, 2-7

FRONT L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-31

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, 3-66

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter, 3-63

FRONT STEERING parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-17, 6-42

front-panel

BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-66

display, 2-3

overview, 2-2, 2-4

RV-8, 2-2

STATUS parameter, 3-66

HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode, 6-34

HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE DTS listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE L7 listening mode, 6-34

headphone output, 2-5

headphone overview, 2-14

HEADPHONE parameter, 3-69

highlights, RV-8, 1-4

high-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

horizontal bar graphs, 2-16

RV-8 Index

I-3

I/O CONFIG SETUP menu, 3-2

INPUT BALANCE parameter, 6-13, 6-42

input connectors, 2-7

microphone, 2-8

INPUT NAME menu, 3-5

INPUT parameter, 2-35

INPUT SELECT parameter, 3-17, 3-19, D-2

input selection buttons, 2-4

remote control, 2-18

INPUT SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-4, D-2

INPUT TYPE parameter, 2-35

INPUTS

Advanced, 3-17

changing names, 3-5

Main Zone, 2-28, 3-2

installation considerations, 1-5

INTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-56

IR IN connector, 2-9

IR receiver, 2-3

L7 FILM listening mode, 3-13, 6-4

L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-5

L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode, 6-5

L7 TV listening mode, 6-4

LEDs, IR receiver, 2-3

LEGACY VIDEO parameter, 3-21

level meters, 3-10

LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, 3-55

LEVELS CALIBRATIONS menu, D-3

LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

LFE MIX parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22,

6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-32,

6-33, 6-42

LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-59

LIMITER parameter, 3-58, 3-59

LISTENER POS parameter, 6-42

listening mode

activating, 6-2

descriptions, 6-4

parameter descriptions, 6-39

preferred, 6-3

selection buttons, 6-3

listening modes, preferred, 3-12, 3-14

LIVE! CALIBRATION

menu, 3-3

parameter, 3-80

performing, 3-83

LIVE! listening mode, 6-35

LIVE! STATUS menu, 2-33

LIVENESS parameter, 6-11, 6-42

loading presets, 2-11

LOCK OPTIONS, 3-79

AUDIO CNTRL parameter, 3-79

menu, 3-3

MODES parameter, 3-79

SETUP parameter, 3-79

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-5

LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter, 6-13, 6-42

low-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0 parameter, 3-62

MAIN 7.1 parameter, 3-62

MAIN ADVANCED option, 3-17

MAIN menu, 2-15

MAIN PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Main Zone Off button, 2-5

Main Zone selection buttons, 2-4

maintenance, 7-4

manual analog audio adjustments, 3-10

manual calibration, 3-53

MANUAL parameter, 3-9, 3-10

manual speaker distance calibration, 3-54

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-53

MASTER LEVEL parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-43

MAX VOLUME parameter, 3-69

menu arrow buttons, 2-15

menu item selection, 2-15

menu navigation, 2-15

menu options, 2-16

Menu tree, B-2

MIC MODE menu, 3-16

MIC parameter, 3-12

MICROPHONE CHECK option, 3-36

microphone input connectors, 2-8

microphones

automatic calibration, 3-42, 3-48

checking, 3-40

connecting, 3-37, 3-80

improper positioning, 3-39, 3-46, 3-47, 3-82

placement, 3-42

proper positioning, 3-38, 3-43, 3-44, 3-45, 3-81

MID RT parameter, 6-12, 6-43

MIX ROOM parameter, 2-35

MODE ADJUST menu, 6-2

mode buttons, 2-4

MODE parameter, 2-35

MONO listening mode, 6-16

MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-15

MONO SURROUND listening mode, 6-16

Mute button, 2-5

MUTE LEVEL parameter, 3-68

NAME parameter, 3-5

naming presets, 2-11

NIGHTCLUB listening mode, 6-11

Off buttons, 2-5, 2-5

on-screen display

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-65

FORMAT parameter, 3-65

POSITION parameter, 3-65

STATUS parameter, 3-64

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, 3-64, D-4

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY parameter, 3-63

output connectors

audio, 2-8, 2-9

trigger, 2-8

video, 2-7

OUTPUT LEVELS menu, 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9,

Index Lexicon

I-4

6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20,

6-21, 6-22, 6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31,

6-32, 6-33, 6-43

Output levels, calibrating

automatic, 3-36

Bass Peak Limiters, 3-58

manual, 3-55

PANORAMA listening mode, 6-13

PANORAMA parameter, 6-8, 6-43

parameter drop-down menus, 2-16

parameter relationships, 6-47

parameters

listening mode menu, 6-39

STATUS menu, 2-34

parameters, preferred listening mode selection, 3-12

phono input connectors, 2-8

POWER MANAGEMENT menu, 3-3

power switch, 2-9

PRE-DELAY parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-43

preferred listening mode selection, 3-14

Preferred listening modes, 3-12

PRESET NAME option, 3-76

product registration, 1-5

program operation parameters, 3-71

programming macro buttons, C-10

cloning the remote control, C-15

editing text on buttons, C-13

erasing favorite channel, C-13

erasing learned buttons, C-14

erasing macro functions, C-12, C-13

erasing punch through functions, C-13

programming backlight, C-15

punch through functions, C-12

recalling preprogrammed numbers, C-14

sample sequence, C-11

RADIO TEXT parameter, 3-77

RDS NAME option, 3-76

REAR DLY OFFSET parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17,

6-26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-43

Rear L/R output connector, 2-7

REAR L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44

rear-panel

overview, 2-6

RV-8, 2-6

recalling zone audio codes, C-16

RECORD parameter, 3-23, 3-24

RE-EQUALIZER parameter, 6-4, 6-6, 6-9, 6-10, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-43

REGION parameter, 3-72

remote control

battery installation, 1-6

buttons, 2-17

command matrix, 2-18, 2-18

operation considerations, 2-14

remote control buttons, 2-17

remote control overview, 2-14

remote control programming, C-2

auto scan with three-digit number, C-6

device activation, C-2

macro operations, C-3

overview, C-4

programming device buttons, C-8

programming favorite channels, C-9

programming function buttons, C-8

using learning method, C-7

using programmed codes, C-5

REMOTE ONLY parameter, 3-70

reprogramming zone audio codes, C-17

RESET MODE parameter, 6-38, 6-44

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu, 3-6

restoring factory-default settings, 7-4

REVERB LVL parameter, 6-40, 6-42, 6-44, 6-44, 6-46

ROLLOFF parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44

routine maintenance, 7-4

RS-232 connectors, 2-9

RV-8about, 1-2

highlights, 1-4

product registration, 1-5

safety instructions, 1-ii

SAMPLE RATE parameter, 2-35

saving presets, 2-11

Scan Mode, 2-11

SCAN SENS parameter, 3-73

SCROLL RATE parameter, 3-77

selecting a station, 2-10

SET CROSSOVERS option, 3-25

SET DISTANCES menu, 3-51

SET LEVELS menu, 3-51

SETTING DISTANCES menu, 3-49

SETTING LEVELS menu, 3-49

SETUP menu, 2-16, 3-2

SHAPE parameter, 6-44

SIDE L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44

SIZE parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44

SOUND STAGE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-44

SOURCE parameter, 6-46

SPEAKER ANGLE parameter, 6-45

SPEAKER DISTANCES, 3-53

SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, 3-54

SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-25

speaker setup parameters, 3-29

SPEECH DETECT parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-45

SPREAD parameter, 6-45

Standby button, 2-4

STATUS menu

level meters, 2-35

parameters, 2-34

STATUS menus, 2-29

SUB & SUB LVL parameter, 6-45

SUB L/R LVL parameter, 6-33

SUB LEVEL parameter, 6-15, 6-16, 6-23, 6-24, 6-29

SUB parameter, 6-37

SUBWOOFER parameter, 3-29, 3-33

SURR MIX LVL parameter, 2-35

SURR ROLLOFF parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-23

SURROUND DLY parameter, 6-8, 6-45

SURROUND EX parameter, 6-19, 6-31, 6-45

SURROUND MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-46

S-VIDEO 16

RV-8 Index

I-5

9 parameter, 3-17, 3-18

S-VIDEO OSD 4

3 parameter, 3-17, 3-20

S-Video output connectors, 2-8

three-digit preprogrammed codes, C-18

THX listening mode, 6-18

THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-19

THX SETUP Menu, 3-29

THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, 3-28, 3-28

THX SurEX listening mode, 6-18

THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-18

THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter, 3-29, 3-34

TILT EQ parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-5

TREB CUT RT parameter, 6-46

TREBLE parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-3

trigger output connectors, 2-8

TRIGGER SETUP, 3-70

TRIGGER SETUP menu, 3-2

troubleshooting, 7-2

Troubleshooting automatic calibration, 3-52

Tune/Seek access, 2-10

TUNE/SEEK Buttons, 2-5, 2-5

tuner antenna connectors, 2-8

tuner overview, 2-10

TUNER PRESETS menu, 5-2

TUNER PRESETS parameter, 3-75

Tuner Regions, 3-73

TUNER SETUP menu, 3-3

TUNER SETUP option, 3-72

Tuner status, 2-29

Two-line Status, 2-28, 2-29

Ultra2-certified, 3-34

understanding the zones, 2-28

USE LAST parameter, 3-14

VIDEO IN parameter, 3-11

video input connectors, 2-7

video output connectors, 2-7

VOCAL ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-26,

6-29, 6-30, 6-46

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-68

volume knob, 2-3

WORD LENGTH parameter, 2-35

Z2 PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Z3 PWR ON parameter, 3-69

Zone 2 Off button, 2-5

Zone 2 selection buttons, 2-4

Zone 3 Off button, 2-5

Zone 3 selection buttons, 2-4

ZONE2 ADVANCED inputs, 3-23

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-2, 4-2

ZONE2 IN parameter, 3-21

ZONE2 IN parameter settings, 3-22

Zones, understanding, 2-28

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register this product within 15 days of

purchase. To do so, complete and return this card

or register online at www.lexicon.com. Retain the

sales receipt for proof of coverage.

Mr. Mrs. Ms. Miss

Single Married Divorced Widowed

First Name Last Name

Company Title

Mailing Address

City State Zip

Telephone Number Fax Number

Email Address

Product Model Purchase Date

Version Serial Number

Where did you purchase this product?

Age Education Household Income

Under 18 High School Under $20,000

18-24 College $20,000 to $34,999

25-34 Graduate School $35,000 to $49,000

35-49 Certificate: $50,000 to $74,999

50-64 $75,000 to $99,000

65+ $100,000+

How did you learn about this product? Choose one:

Friend Store salesperson Advertisement

Colleague Store display Magazine Article

Teacher Received as a gift Own other Lexicon

products

Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product?

Sound Quality Value for price Durability

Features Brandname Other:

What are your three favorite magazines?

1. 2. 3.

What are your three favorite websites?

1. 2. 3.

What features would you like to see added to this product in the future?

RV-8 01/06

LIMITED WARRANTY

Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty

on this product:

What is the Duration of this Warranty?

This warranty will remain in effect for three (3) years

from the original date of purchase.

Who is Covered?

This warranty may be enforced by the original pur-

chaser and subsequent owners during the warranty

period, provided the original dated sales receipt or

other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time

of service.

What is Covered?

This warranty covers all defects in material and

workmanship on this product, except as specified

below. The following are not covered:

1. Damage resulting from

A. Accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.

B. Failure to follow instructions contained in the

user guide.

C. Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by

Harman Specialty Group.

D. Failure to perform recommended periodic

maintenance.

2. Causes other than product defects, including lack

of skill, competence, or experience on the part of

the owner.

3. Damage occurring during any shipment of this

product. Claims for shipping damages must be

made with the carrier.

4. Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on

which the serial number has been defaced, modi-

fied, or removed.

What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group

Assume?

Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material

expenses for covered items. Payment of shipping

charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.

How is Service Obtained?

When this product needs service, write, telephone, or

fax Harman Specialty Group to request information

about where the unit should be taken or sent. When

making a written request, please include your name,

complete address, and daytime telephone number;

the product model and serial numbers; and a descrip-

tion of the problem. Do not return the unit to Harman

Specialty Group without prior authorization.

When Shipping a Product for Service . . .

1. Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the

responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are

covered by this warranty, Harman Specialty

Group will pay return shipping charges to any

destination in the United States using the carrier

of our choice.

2. Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is

strongly recommended.

3. Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.

(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be

presented whenever warranty service is required.)

4. Do not include accessories such as power cords or

user guides unless instructed to do so.

What are the Limitations of Implied

Warranties?

Any implied warranties, including warranties of mer-

chantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are

limited in duration to the length of this warranty.

What Certain Damages are Excluded?

Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defective

product is limited to repair or replacement of that

product, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shall

not be liable for damages based on inconvenience;

loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted

operation; commercial loss; or any other damages,

whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.

How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?

Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of

implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation

of incidental or consequential damages. As such, the

above limitations may not apply.

This warranty is not enforceable outside of North

America. This warranty provides specific legal rights.

Additional rights may be provided by some states.

Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413

USA

Customer Service

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)

Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0490

www.lexicon.com

A Harman International Company

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Lexicon Rv 8 Owner S Manual

RV-8 to the manual 925c3041-409a-4577-bb1f-3a0a8e8a3ef5

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation